Home

WANDL Training Guide for NPAT and IP

1. Figure 8 5 Node Labels Window The nodes on the Map should now be labelled by their ID s N1 N2 and N3 Now that you have added some nodes the next step is to add links between them Go to Modify gt Elements gt Links to bring up the Links window Click on the Add button to add a new link to the network An Add Link window will appear Apply Template Default v Auto Add on Mouse Clicks Properties Location Partition User Parameters Name Link_N1_to_N2 Trunk r4 BW Vendor DEF Ovhd OO Admin Status Unknown Unknown Cost Delay Service ATM gt C Fixed a Media J Fail 0 vnet NONE x Avail Facility Misc Comment ppp 2 a jai PE Figure 8 6 Add Link Window Enter in the link name Link N1 to N2 into the Name field and select T1 for Trunk Leave the other properties as they are Check the checkbox labelled Auto Add on Mouse Clicks in the top right corner of the Add Link window Move the Add Link window and or Map window around so that the nodes N1 and N2 are visible If you have many windows on the screen you can bring the desired window to the front via the Windows menu on the main menu bar Put your mouse over the Map window and you will see that the cursor will become a cross hair on the map Click on node N1 for your first endpoint Then click on node N2 as your second endpoint Th
2. 0 088546 10 170353 10 462632 10 482747 1 1508 0 76420 0 560694 0 463437 I a ke CH ris i In 281018 Filter I ARS 180f18 displayed Map Rut Step Reset Simulation Close Help Figure 15 4 Fail Links Window 7 Checkmark a few of these checkboxes The console will report that those links are brought down For example here is the resulting console message from checkmarking LINK1 and LINK3 LINK1 ATL HOU ATT 1 LINK3 BOS DET ATT 1 OC3 OSPF AREA AREAO Down OC3 OSPF AREA AREAO Down 8 Alternatively you can fail a link directly from the map Select one or more links on the map using Ctrl click to highlight the links to fail Then right click over one of the selected link s and select Fail Selected Links Fail Links Under Pointer Reset Links Under Pointer Fail Selected Links Reset Selected Links Figure 15 5 Fail Selected Links 9 Right click on the console and turn the Trace option on and then select a trace file name in which to save the simulation output 10 To start the simulation click on the Run button either the Run button on the Interactive Scenarios window or the triangle icon on the main menu bar At the end of the simulation there will be some console messages The links brought down during the simulation will be colored gray and marked with a red F symbol on the Map Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc SI
3. For a basic introduction to the Traffic Generation wizard please refer to the Traffic Generation section of the Traffic Menu chapter in the General Reference Guide For instructions on generating VoIP traffic please refer to the Voice over IP chapter of the Router Guide For instructions on generating VPN traffic please refer to VPN Traffic Generation on page 10 47 of Chapter 10 Virtual Private Networks in the Router Guide Definitions A Traffic Profile is a group of options and settings that define a set of demands A traffic profile includes values for the total amount of traffic settings that specify the size and type of each individual demand or flow and a list of source and destination locations Multiple traffic profiles can be defined for a network Traffic Generation or Demand Generation refers to the action of generating a demand file based on one or more traffic profiles Once a user has created traffic profiles they can be used to generate demand files which can then be loaded into the network Weights are values assigned to nodes or groups that determine how the total bandwidth defined in the traffic profile is split among the source destination pairs If a node or group is to have more traffic then a larger weight should be assigned to that node or group while smaller nodes or groups should be assigned smaller weights The amount of traffic between two nodes or groups is determined by their individual weights relative
4. LkBw Link Hop Hop Count Bandwidth BwRat HPr OvSub ATL HOU ATT down 1 OC3 ATL WDC ATT down 1 OC3 Simulate 5 3 5 1 1 000M 2 8 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 15 9 SIMULATION 15 15 10 demand 83 4 0 0 0 0 0 5 RESET NETWORK TO ORIGINAL STATE __ day 1 ATL HOU ATT down 1 OC3 BOS DET ATT down 1 OC3 Simulate 5 40 3 26 000M 72 2 2 demand 731 0 0 0 0 0 3 In this case since there are 2 layers demands and tunnels the first line prefixed with Simulate is for tunnels and the second line prefixed with demand is for demands 36 View the Peak Utilization Report from Report gt Report Manager 37 You can open the scripts window again using Simulation gt Predefined Scenarios and experiment with changing the selections in the Report Options tab to alter what gets displayed in the report For detailed information please consult The Simulation Menu chapter of the General Reference Guide Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Simulation Reports 38 39 40 SIMULATION To view simulation reports open the Report Manager by selecting Report gt Report Manager while in Simulation mode For router networks the reports will vary depending upon whether you are in layer 2 or layer 3 Select the Layer 2 or Layer 3 button below the main menu bar to change layers and then reselect Report gt Report Manager The following is an example of th
5. linkdistunit 50 the program is instructed to use 50 miles as one unit Then the user defined distance for links from 0 to 50 miles is 1 Similarly for links from 51 to 100 miles the user defined distance 1s set to 2 53 The linkdist file can be read in from the File gt Load Network Files gt Network Files tab in the WANDL client before design is performed The bblink file can be modified in the Graphical User Interface using Modify Links and adding one of the following DIST x DISTA2Z x DISTZ2A x to the misc field substituting x with the number of your choice Note After you perform your design you may want to save the demand routing using Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Interactive Mode and then select Update Preferred Path Setting if your hardware supports the path select feature MODELING NODE COST 54 There is a parameter that you can use to influence the design to override the Max Trunk BW constraint but with a penalty In this way you can model currently available capacity while allowing trunks beyond this capacity at an additional cost 55 First set the Max Trunk BW attribute on the nodes Select Modify gt Elements gt Nodes select the node of your choice click the Modify button and select the Design Parameters tab This will be used to model the current capacity 56 Next select Tools gt Options gt General Device options pane Click OK to access the console In the Console window select 10
6. path select feature Then any redundant links of the lower capacity trunk can be removed So the cost may be greater than simply starting the design with the higher capacity trunk and then resizing NODE WEIGHT SPECIFICATION 9 The Node Weight option in the Design Options Window is an important design option that impacts the program s design heuristics When running any design or diversity design you should experiment with or tune the value of the node weight setting Increasing the node weight increases a penalty that discourages the program from buying too many trunks to satisfy a demand and encourages the program to buy more direct trunks instead Therefore if you find that a design results in the purchasing of many parallel links you should try to increase the Node Weight value in the Design Options window and rerunning the design Conversely if you find that too many direct trunks are being purchased in your network design you should decrease the value of Node Weight 14 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN Green field Design Now we can try a Green field design or a design from scratch This Design option is used to construct a basic backbone topology satisfying all user demands while attempting to minimize transmission line costs Basic design does not provide for redundancy the goal is merely to satisfy all user demands at a minimal price It provides a starting point to designing a refined networ
7. 74 Class2 ys v Install Fee Bands for this Type et Distance up to Monthly Fixed Cost Monthly Inc Cost 0 0 0 0 9499 0 Add Row Delete Row Figure 12 5 Adding a New Custom Rate Entry 10 The Install Fee is a non recurring charge Enter in a number e g 1000 The currency that will be applied depends on the country selected Under Country select US UNITED STATES The price will be interpreted as a dollar amount in that case In the section that is below the link service definition you can enter in distance bands and the recurring fixed cost and incremental cost that apply to each link whose total length falls within that distance band The fixed cost for a link with the appropriate link service refers to a recurring cost that is independent of the link length The incremental cost for a link refers to a recurring cost that is dependent on the link length and that applies for each incremental distance 11 The first distance band is from 0 to the first number entered under Distance upto and the Fixed cost and Inc_cost that apply for that distance band are also listed on the first line of the distance band section The second distance band is from the first number to the second number entered under Distance And so forth Specify the distance unit in the Distance upto text box MILE or KM and the incremental distance for which the incremental cost will apply Continue to add bands
8. D amp amp 1 e es R a amp P B _ Figure 6 21 Navigator Window The Navigator pane gives a view of the entire topology with a black inner rectangle around the area in view as it is displayed in the right side of the window As you zoom in the topology the navigator will keep your place a Drag the black inner rectangle around to pan across the network topology The portion of the network in view on the right side of the window will change accordingly b Click on the Zoom In button in the toolbar magnifying glass with a sign within Then hold down the left mouse button and drag to choose a rectangle To select a rectangle with the same aspect ratio as the map window click on the Zoom In button again and hold down the lt Shift gt key while dragging the rectangle Click on the Zoom Out button in the toolbar magnifying glass with a sign within Each time it is clicked on the map gets zoomed out of by a fixed percentage The center of the map 1s fixed Click on the Zoom To Fit button a magnifying glass with a box within in the toolbar The entire topology is displayed within the topology view window 6 16 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS 65 In the right click menu of the topology view the same zooming options are given plus a few additional ones listed below Zoom H zoom In Shap Zoom to Fit Zoom to Fit Selection Export a Exp
9. Overwrite Existing rather than New Another status you may see is Missing which indicates that a network file specified in the spec file was not found If you have made a mistake in your specifications click on the lt Back button to make modifications 20 Click Load Network and answer any dialog boxes that may be displayed with a Yes A map Map Standard window will be drawn as shown in Figure 4 7 It is empty because no node information has yet been specified Note the console messages displayed in the Console at the bottom the main window When the loading is completed the bottom left corner of the main window will say Ready 21 You can now proceed to add additional nodes links and demands to your network Tips on Spec Creation If you create network files before spec file creation it is helpful to put them in the same directory and name them with the convention lt filetype gt lt runcode gt For example you can name your node file to muxloc x and link file to bblink x if you plan on using the runcode x In that case after specifying the runcode and clicking Next in the Spec File Generation window the program can help you populate the spec file for you You will be prompted with the dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 CM gt Gy Files exist with this runcode Use these files ves No Figure 4 7 Dialog to use Preexisting Files Click Yes to use
10. Summary 21 Select 4 to view the differences graphically in the Map window This allows you to visually identify which links were added or deleted in the new design The following display options appear Display Options 1 All 2 Deleted 3 Added 4 Rearrange 5 Clear 6 Save Graphical Diff Select Select 1 to view all links including identical deleted and new links Select 2 to only view the links deleted from the Original Link File Select option 3 Added to only view the links added in the New Link File Option 4 displays the links that were considered rearrangeable Option 5 clears the screen Option 6 allows the user to save the graphical differences between the two link files Note The Display Options gt 6 Save Graphical Diff option is only for graphical differences and is to be distinguished from the Compare Backbone Menu gt 3 Save Link Comparisons option described in the previous step Note that links are color coded to make them easier to distinguish e Links identical in both files are drawn in BLUE e Links added to the New Link File are drawn in YELLOW e Links deleted from the Original Link File are drawn in RED Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN new incremental View Changes bblink greenfield design 1 link added Figure 14 6 Viewing the Changes to the Link Topology After a Design When answering y to the Perform vendor and site adjustment prompt the locally rearrangea
11. 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Cut Copy and Paste Users can perform quick modifications to the network topology by utilizing the cut copy and paste functions in Modify mode If the node contains router config XML data it is carried over as well 60 Select the nodes you wish to cut or copy Any links that both originate and terminate at the selected nodes will be included as well Right click on the topology map and select Cut Selection or Copy Selection as shown in Figure 6 19 Note Before using Cut Selection it is advised to save the network environment since this operation cannot be undone Cut Selection Copy Selection Paste Selection to Logical Entity Link ta Logical Entity Jnattached Figure 6 19 Cut Copy and Paste Menu Items 61 Right click on the topology map where you wish to paste the nodes and select Paste A dialogue box asking if you wish to create a group will appear as shown in Figure 6 18 Group During Paste vi X 2 Create a group around the nodes each time they are pasted Always Yes this time Not this time Meyer Figure 6 20 Group During Paste Dialogue Box The nodes and their links will now be pasted around the location where the mouse was previously right clicked These elements can also be dragged around with the mouse and positioned at an appropriate location Numerical characters are appended to the names of each pasted element in an ascendin
12. 30 878BP Average hops 1 78 Max hops 3 0 paths exceed hop limit of 8 gt gt Backbone Link Information saved in file DSGNLINK uk gt gt Backbone Path Assignment Information saved in file DSGNPATH uk xxx Reroute demands from scratch using different order Start diversity design loop 2 a xx Iteration 130 PVCs 130 placed 0 unplaced 0 deactivated Average hops 1 78 Max hops 3 0 paths exceed hop limit of 8 Pass site amp link diversity check 9 Els Total Link Cost 30 8 6BP 9 Els Total Link Cost 30 878BP Time for Diversity Design Tuning 1s gt gt Backbone Link Information saved in file DSGNLINK uk gt gt Backbone Path Assignment Information saved in file DSGNPATH uk 9 Els Total Link Cost 30 878BP Compared to the standard design 24 926 BP this diversity design 1s about 5 000 British Pounds more expensive Remember that you can experiment with the Design Options to influence the design 9 E1 cost 24976 9 E1 cost 50876 Figure 14 8 Basic Design left Diversity Design right Tip After adding links to satisfy diversity constraints links are checked to see if they can be removed while still satisfying the diversity constraints This can take a long time for a large network To limit the number of links checked for removal in a diversity design you can select Tools gt Options gt Design and set Max Div Link Check in the Design options window Select None to prevent any such
13. A dialog box allows you to choose different levels of grouping Click Done if you have no further grouping level to request AutoGroup Level 1 i x At the first coarsest level of grouping how should the nodes be grouped Figure 6 24 AutoGroup Dialog Box The first level will be used to group all the points The second level will be used to create subgroups within each group The third level will be used to create subgroups within each subgroup And so forth Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Note Creating groups using AutoGroup will overwrite any existing groups so this feature is good for creating groups from scratch For more on grouping you can also refer to the General Reference Guide Viewing Your Network Model By Subview 71 In the pull down menu of the left pane of the topology window select Subview gt Protocols to view the following pane shown in Figure 6 25 The list of Protocols may vary depending upon the protocols available in the current network oe Wap Standard Protocols 16 link cost 201 1425 Show Mot Default r El MPLS TE _ OSPF J eee eee ee ate TaT aTa aTa Figure 6 25 Protocols Pane 72 The Default subview is chosen by default 73 Choose a different protocol subview for example OSPF You can also use the amp and or functions is selected by default to view different logical combinations of prot
14. A very important field is the right most Cost detail it can be hidden via configure columns This field includes a detailed breakdown per network elements part of the routing path In particular the numbers in bracket shows how much flow bandwidth is using this network element e g 1G 10G They also show the contribution of the flow to the total network element cost 13 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN his chapter describes how to design your backbone and resize your links based on the traffic utilization for normal or failure conditions Background and Definitions Backbone designs come in two different classes basic design and diversity design Basic design aims only at providing a backbone topology that will satisfy demands plus any user specified constraints at the minimal transmission line cost Diversity design or resiliency design aims at providing for redundancy at the minimal transmission line cost The aim of redundancy is to create a topology where demands can still be routed under any single link node site failure WANDL allows for two classes of demands critical and essential where all mission critical demands should be able to route under any single link single node single site failure and all essential demands should be able to route under any single link failure and any other user specified constraints are met Whether a demand is mission critical or essential depends upon the priorities
15. At this moment you may encounter a popup message as shown below This message indicates that you either do not have the appropriate password within your license file to open this network or your password license has expired Note To examine your password license view the npatpw file located on your server in u wanddb sys npatpw or WANDL_HOME db sys npatpw If your license has expired see the line expire date please contact Juniper support Otherwise proceed to the next step y Password for GENATM is either missing or expired Contact support wandl com for assistance Figure 1 1 Typical Missing Password Warning 3If you see such a warning as in Figure IJ 1 you will need to edit the sample network files slightly to accommodate the network hardware types for which you do have a license to Because the sample network files are not writeable the following procedure is the simplest one to get your sample network up and running 4Log into your server machine Then do the following at the prompt denoted by gt below gt cd u wandl sample IP gt Co ft fish Crsh2 Cd ishzZ gt chmod 666 The above commands first makes a complete copy of the fish folder to the fish2 folder and then changes the permissions of all the files so that they are writeable or editable by you Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc I 1 Instead of fish2 you may wish to specify a different location For exa
16. Data y Voice Select All Status v Placed C1 Unplaced _ Deactivated Hops al Select All Owner Any mA Type LS PA o a UT PriPre Service ay Path Config Options v nes Figure 9 7 Find Demands Window Then click OK to view the matched demands as shown in Figure 9 8 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS is at Node H1 Actions NodeDetailA N aueDelailA BW AZ By AT Type ART Type ZA Pril Prel Current Route c configured d Seconda LINK _M1_TO_N2 No Pret 0 momia N3 NT psoko ANRT gt 0707 LINK NS TONI No Pret MyDmd_5 NT N22 760 0K 0 RNRT 07 07 LINK N1_TO_N2 No Pref MyDmd_6 INT IN rsookjo RNRT b 107107 LINK_N3_TO_N1 Mo Pref Figure 9 8 Demands at Node N1 with bandwidth 750K Note that this window displays not only the demands originating at N1 but also those that terminate at N1 18 Click on the Modify button and select All Entries to modify these demands The following window shown in Figure 9 9 appears Owner Any Y I Multiply BY by w _ Remove Current Route A Z Z A paw am st Gel Fri Fre E E Service ss r Path Red Path Config Options Miscellaneous Comment Figure 9 9 Global Modify 2 demands 19 In the BW textfield enter in 3M in the A Z direction and 1M in the Z A di
17. INTERACTIVE MODE Use interactive mode to decide for each demand whether you would like to route according to the path calculated during the program s tuning 4 Select Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Interactive Mode to get the following Console menu and then select 1 Path Placement Menu Le TUNING 2 Design from Scratch 3 Reset to Routing in Demand File Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc PATH PLACEMENT 4 Path Comparison 5 Modify Diverse Path Routing 6 Update Preferred Path Setting Select 1 5 You will get the following if some paths are already marked as preferred using the path select flag Tuning 1 paths have selected path assigned to them Follow Path Select when possible y n 6 Otherwise aes Tana tC Placement Method 1 Sequential 2 Free run Select q QUIT TUNING SEQUENTIAL PATH PLACEMENT METHOD Using the sequential path placement method the user can direct the program to place only those demands that are not already placed or to modify existing path placements 66 99 7 Select 1 to run sequential path placement and then y to enter interactive mode Placement Method Sequential Path s placed according to order selected Interactive Mode default no y n y Enter path name all or unplaced n next In the interactive mode the program will ask the user whether it should use the new path when a better path is found 8 To indicate wh
18. Launch the Revision Manager via the Tools menu as described in step 1 on page 21 2 through step 2 on page 21 3 View the details of a revision file as described in step 2 on page 21 2 through step 3 on page 21 2 Modify your current network as described in step 5 on page 21 3 through step 6 on page 21 4 Check in any new revision files as described in step 7 on page 21 4 through step 8 on page 21 4 o A P N Compare two different revision files and view its differences as described in step 10 on page 21 4 through step 8 on page 21 7 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 21 1 Be BOTH TOOLS LP Ee PS a Detailed Procedures Compare current file in network with another file in the file system Save the differences into a text file on the client View aggregated demand information Compare two arbitrary files in the file system that are of the same type and view its differences Set display options to view the linkconf link configuration file Use the command line comparison utility wcompare sh The following two sections of this tutorial will be separated by the two versions of the file comparison tool File Comparison and Revision Manager The sections following that will discuss all common features between the two versions Opening the File Comparison tool 1 Click on the Tools menu from the main window menu bar and select File Comparison Once the tool is launched it will display all WANDL input files for thi
19. Link Balancing Default v Lens re Figure 16 1 Path Placement Design Options Here you can specify various path placement parameters like the maximum number of hops for a demand path Max Hop and the oversubscription factor for ATM ROUTING METHOD Note that in cases in which routing methods differ per quality class of service the selection box may be on a different tab that allows you to specify a different routing method for each quality class of service The options for routing method include Constant Distance shortest hop Actual Mileage Admin Weight Delay OSPF ISIS IGRP and EIGRP Options may vary depending on the hardware type PLACEMENT ORDER To allow for a variety of possible hardware behaviors eight different demand placement orders are currently supported High Priority First Input Order High Priority First Scramble High Priority High BW Demands First Input Order Scramble Randomly Low Bandwidth Demands First Scramble High Bandwidth Demands First Scramble Input Order Here input orderrefers to the order in the demand file Note If multiple demands are specified in one demand entry they are routed one at a time independently PATH SELECTION METHOD In the case where there are multiple shortest cost paths three different path selection methods are currently supported Hardware Implementation Shortest Path Encountered First and Select Randomly among best candidates PEAK RATE REQUIREMENT T
20. Note that the total bandwidth is 2 048M This is the total bandwidth of an El trunk View the utilization under the Util column It is over 0 90 utilized in both A gt Z and Z gt A directions Close this window 5 Ifyou wish you can select Layout gt Recalculate Layout from the map s right click menu to draw all nodes in their geographical locations While not necessary it may be visually helpful to the user since geographical coordinates are used to approximate pricing 6 Select Tools gt Options gt Design to get the following window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 3 DESIGN IPMPLS View Options General Backbone Design Backbone Design Diversity Design Parameters Resize Backbone Type STM Config Editor l E DemandTunnel Sizing Fath Placement Failure Simulation ore Backbone Type sTmd Integrity Checks err eee ere Ra tchat cH Wap Preferences Report Activate Fixed Links ves Mo Max Intra Lata Hop 3 YolP Max Link Check all Max Div Link Check Al v Mode Weight 100 Re Route Check ji Preserve Required Path Setting C Yes No Figure 14 3 Design Options BACKBONE TYPE SPECIFICATION 7 Click on the Backbone Type select box and select E1 Set the Node Weight to 200 Enter in the optional New Link Prefix so the program can give a name for the links that are added during design Then click OK Note that the program can
21. Prerequisites T his chapter describes how to use the Report Manager Use the Report Manager to view detailed information about your network For example you can view information about demand path and diversity link utilization equivalent cost multiple paths link partitions and BGP integrity checks Prior to beginning this task you must have created or opened a spec file This tutorial will use spec mpls fish from the u wandl sample IP fish directory For help opening a spec file refer to Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project For help creating a spec file see Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model You should have an overview of the WANDL software s functionality Related Documentation This guide explains how to use the WANDL client to view reports For a guide on how to interpret the reports please see the File Format Guide For an overview of the WANDL software or for a detailed description of each feature and the use of each WANDL client window refer to the General Reference Guide Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline explaining how to use the report manager and the associated recommended procedures 1 Find out where to change report options as described in Report Options on page 19 2 2 Open the Report Manager as described in Navigating the Report Manager on page 19 3 and view report information in the Explanation window 3 Save areport to the server
22. Prune Link option Resize Having completed the basic design or diversity design the resize option allows the user to switch to other trunks in order to minimize the link cost while still satisfying the given diversity design parameters After the resize effort is completed a report is given of the possible monthly savings if the links are modified using lower cost links If there is a potential saving you will have the option of updating all or selected links In some cases after design there will still be oversubscription and the resize option may help the user to resolve the oversubscription problems This oversubscription can result after design 1f the trunk you are designing with does not have a large enough capacity Or even if you do choose a large enough capacity trunk it may not get purchased in special situations This may happen for instance if a hardware device does not have the path select feature The design option only purchases all that would be needed granted that the device could select certain paths as preferred In connectionless networks what is purchased may not actually be enough to avoid oversubscription because of the limitations inherent in not having the path select feautre These oversubscription problems may be resolvable however by using the Resize option 30 Using the sample network in u wandl sample IP fish spec mpls fish this example will grow the traffic tenfold and then run through the exercise of r
23. This exercise demonstrates the functionality of Create Simplified Group Model It can help consolidate the network topology and simply design plan and what if studies Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 21 DESIGN 14 14 22 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc SIMULATION his chapter describes how to perform simulations in your network In Failure Analysis path provisioning simulates the hardware s implementation of bandwidth allocation and demand routing on the existing topology The user can run interactive simulations or simulation scripts pre defined or user created In addition the user can try simulating path placement for several iterations to see what impact demand path placement and demand routing order have on the network Backbone Simulation The Backbone Simulation module performs dynamic routing simulations of demands in the backbone network It is assumed that all paths are initially placed by the hardware at set up Once placed a demand is rerouted only when network failure occurs or when it is preempted by a higher priority demand When a node or link failure occurs the simulation module attempts to find new routes for all of the disconnected demands Higher priority demands are placed before those with lower priority If the network does not have enough bandwidth for a demand the simulation will take bandwidth from a minimum set of demands whose priorities are less than the current demand The simula
24. Your results will be stored in nohup out CREATING YOUR OWN KEYSTROKES INPUT If you are familiar with the menu options and the flow of the menus you can create your own input file 23 For example suppose in one scenario I type in u wandl bin bbdsgn spec uk traceinput Then suppose I choose the options necessary to perform a design remove redundant links perform a diversity design on spec dog and then exit from bbdsgn Suppose my resulting input tre file looks as follows Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 22 5 TEXT MODE 3 y 4 q q y 7 was for the design menu 3 was for basic design y was for removing redundant links and 4 was for diversity design Finally q q and y were used to exit bbdsgn Note that if instead of choosing y to remove redundant links I simply pressed enter to choose the default value my file would look as follows 7 3 4 q q y Now supposing I have a much larger set of demands to read in and I know the questions bbdsgn will ask will be exactly the same I can create a second spec file spec uk2 exactly the same except for a different demand file Then I can run the following command u wandl bin bbdsgn spec uk2 lt input trc gt dog2output Note Note that you must be careful in certain cases If your input files are different enough that the bbdsgn program is triggered to ask an extra question or a different question s
25. leave the node colors the same as for the previous legend Other legends like AS change the node colors but not the link colors Others like Types change both 14 Colors can be changed by clicking on the button next to the type of element you want to change 15 In addition to colors node icons and line styles e g solid vs dotted can be changed by right clicking over one of the buttons for nodes or links For node icons the menu is Set This Icon and for link styles it is Set Line Style The setting applies when the particular legend in which you set the line style e g Vendor is open For more details on these options refer to the Reference Guide chapter on topology 16 Right click a node or link icon on the left pane Notice the menu item Highlight These Items which can be used to highlight all nodes or links of a particular type This option is also available in many other Legends panes including Vendors Media Domain Area Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 5 USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Network Element Labels NODE LABELS 17 To label the devices right click on the network model area of the topology window for the right click menu shown in Figure 6 7 18 links cost 2817570 Map Views Grouping Select R R N N Copy Selection iS Selection to Logical Entity Show All None N j Layout p Link Labels Background Image Group Labels Country M
26. lt specfilepath gt where lt specfilepath gt 1s the relative or absolute path to the file that contains the names of the network input files 3 Or try 5 d lt specriledir gt u wandl bin bbdsgn specfile where lt specfiledir gt is the directory containing the spec file 4 To view a help menu type in u wandl bin bbdsgn h Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 22 1 TEXT MODE 22 Navigation in the menu Read Files 5 When you execute bbdsgn specfile where specfile is the file that contains the names of all the default input files the following menu is displayed bbdsgn MAIN MENU GENERIC Read Files Save Files Network Information Reports Modify Configuration Path Placement Backbone Design Failure Simulation 9 Discrete Event Simulation TO Call by CalLl Simulation Lil SVC Call Sim lation 12 Access Design Select q QUIT UNIX g Graphics O I owt WN EF Note that the options may vary depending upon the modules purchased 6 To access a menu option type in the corresponding number and then return To get back to the main menu from a submenu you can usually enter q or simply lt Return gt to go up the menu levels where the main menu is the top most level For example type 5 and lt Return gt to select 5 Modify Configuration 7 To quit from the main menu enter q and lt Return gt Then answer y to the following question Exit BBDSGN
27. or you may load parameters from a preexisting network model Note that these steps are not necessary if you have existing router configuration files To import router configuration files to automatically create a spec file see the Router Guide chapter Router Data Extraction Definition of a spec file When to use Prerequisites Each spec file correlates to a network project As was explained in depth in Chapter 2 What is a Spec File the spec file is a file that specifies to the program where to look for different kinds of information regarding the particular network model Such information includes information about nodes links demands and more If you are starting a network from scratch the minimum information needed in the spec file is the dparam file and the runcode system file name extension Be sure to specify the hardware type in the dparam file The runcode is used to identify the network files that belong to the same network project Whenever you save your network environment all the files associated with your network will be given the same runcode or file name extension of your choosing If you have preexisting network data it should be organized into WANDL file format Before the program can read any model network that you create you must create a spec file Note that for users with the live network option a default spec file will be automatically created Use the procedures outlined in this chapter to
28. s right click menu If none are found you may get an empty window 7 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION L Network Info lt Network Demands through link BOS DET Actions Nodes ID IP_A Modez ID Type fou a BOS F30 7E TK ir 1 ey fows m per terre CR cumma A Eos CH rock mows os JDA beuk R fowls BOS DEN s ook R CURE SN 580K ROO Modes E ER El 30 of 30 displayed Statistics View View Type Total EW Placed BW Unplaced BW Disabled Bi Data 137 467M 137 467M 0 0 Figure 7 6 Demands through Link Window Each demand and its associated properties is listed one record per line entry The scrollbars provide an easy way to sort through the demands and their properties Because there can be many demands in a network the display shows a maximum of 100 demands at a time Underneath the list of demands is displayed the number of demands found When more than 100 demands are found click on the arrow pointing to the right to see the the next set of records Or to show more than 100 demands in one page or to go to a particular page click the page button E Note that you can only open one such Demands through Link window at a time If you open a second one the first one will be erased to avoid cluttering your workspace 25 Above the table on the right is an Actions button Select it to view the following options Detail V
29. which all of the elements are located at one point for example if the layout was never recalculated right clicking over one of the nodes allows you to view the node information for all the underlying nodes as well When there is more than one node listed in the View Nodes window the arrow buttons at the bottom will be enabled to let you traverse the list Alternatively you can click on the desired node entry in the list and the information in the tabs will then reflect the attributes of the selected node Notice that on most windows there is a help button Clicking on the Help button will bring up context sensitive help items for the particular window You can also try viewing information only for selected highlighted nodes from the map First select some nodes to highlight them For example you can press your mouse down on the map and drag your mouse to draw a rectangle When you release your mouse the nodes inside that rectangle will be highlighted Or you can use lt Shift gt click or lt Ctrl gt click to select multiple nodes Refer to Chapter 6 Using the Topology Windows for more ways of selecting nodes Right click over one of the selected highlighted nodes and select View gt Selected Nodes Click on the Properties tab to see location information for the selected row Click on a different item on the nodes list and observe what happens on the map This will highlight the selected node on the map You can right click over a link
30. y n Note When the program is doing time consuming work such as backbone design failure analysis or circuit path display the user can interrupt the process by pressing lt Ctrl gt c a few times The user will be given the option of quitting the program at that point Files specified in the spec file are read in automatically Files not specified in the spec files may be read in using the Read Files option This option can also be used to change these files for different design runs From the Main Menu option can be used to read in backbone demands link configurations the node weight file and the user defined link distance file 8 To access this option go to the main menu and select 1 Read Files by typing l and pressing lt Return gt The following menu is printed Read Files Menu 1 Demand 23 LINK 3 Node Weight 4 Node Parameter 5 User Defined Link Distance 6 PVC Load File Select q Quit UNIX The options in this menu may also be different depending upon your hardware type 9 When options 1 2 3 or 4 are selected the bbdsgn program displays the current setting for that option and asks the user to enter a new filename none or to simply press lt Return gt For example select option 2 for the following Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc TEXT MODE Current bblink file bblink x Enter Name of Link File or none bblink x2 10 The consequent options would be the following e Ifth
31. you can use the spec file located in u wandl sample IP fish 2 In Modify mode select Modify gt Elements gt Sites and an empty Sites window will appear E Network Info Hetwork Sit Mo of Nodes Other CE Owners Facilities o Noes A t gt Ha haa Modify Highlight Highlight All _ciose_ Figure 10 1 Sites window 3 Select Add to create a new site General Site Options Mame OOOO Wiser Parameters Site User Parameters Mame Figure 10 2 Add Site Window 4 Then in the Add Site window enter a site name In this example we will use the site name WEST Click Add to add the new site 10 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING SITES OWNERS ETC 5 Now select the Nodes view of the Network Info window Network pane or select Modify gt Elements gt Nodes from the Modify pull down menu With your mouse select the four most western nodes on the map using the selection techniques explained in Node and Link Selection and Node Rearrangement on page 6 11 in the topology chapter Then select Filter from Map fi in the Nodes window Verify that the four nodes have been filtered to the nodes list Note that you can also do other queries to get the nodes you want to modify 6 Click on the Modify button to modify the selected nodes In the Modify Nodes window click the Advanced Properties tab and select WEST for Site ID as shown in the window in
32. 0 0 40 9 010 001 91010 05 0 0 00 0 910 00 0 220199 2 0 020 2010 90 07 924 0 0 9 90 8 9 0 40 0 010 a 0 Network Service Ts J Service Byy Min BYY Max BYY Pri Pre Other Admin Weights Facilities Multicast Group Xe OSPF Areas GE owners Routing Instances Properties USerParameters SE Service Profiles Service Types Nodes t gt HJO Add Figure 10 10 Service Type telnet 29 Add a new service type telnet by clicking on the Add button to open an Add Service Type window Enter telnet as the service type name 256K as the minimum bandwidth 1M as the maximum bandwidth and the bandwidth from A Z as 256K Click on the Type button to add further specifications such as the Class of Service L Add Service Type Properties User Parametersl Name telnet Owner NONE Min BYW 256K Max BW fiM BV 256K Type Pri Pre Misc EE Comment D Figure 10 11 Add Service Type Note The Min BW and Max BW fields are only used with the Demand Generation feature during which newly generated demands of the given service type are ensured to have a bandwidth between Min BW and Max BW That is a very large generated demand will be split into smaller pieces with a maximum bandwidth of Max Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING SITES OWNERS ETC BW A special license is required for the demand generation feature Please refer to
33. 1455 Other Nodes Ha Highlight Highlight All Close Figure 9 2 Nodes window in Modify mode 4 On the Map window you can also select and highlight one or more nodes Then in the Nodes view click on Filter from Map dg and only those selected nodes will be displayed in the Nodes window Try this now by highlighting node N2 on the Map 5 You can also perform a Filter daj which allows you to search for all nodes matching certain specified properties 6 Ifyou would like to make the same modification to several nodes simultaneously among the nodes listed in the Nodes window select and highlight multiple entries by lt Ctrl gt clicking and or lt Shift gt clicking Then click on the Modify button and the Modify Nodes window will open up as shown in Figure 9 3 In this window change only the fields that are to be modified for all selected nodes Fields left blank will not be touched in any of the nodes CL Modify 3 Nodes Properties Advanced Properties Design Properties User Parameters Properties Location Name cle Search IP Address NPANXX f Lata Hardware Lat Lon WHEN Comment This is a test Figure 9 3 Modify Nodes window 7 Type in a comment in the Comment textbox Then click the OK button to submit the changes Click Yes to confirm that you want to make the modification Or for a multiple n
34. Els Total Link Cost 24 926BP xxx Reroute PVCs from scratch Iteration 130 PVCs 130 placed O unplaced 0 deactivated Average hops 2 21 Max hops 4 0 paths exceed hop limit of 8 gt gt Backbone Link Information saved in file DSGNLINK uk gt gt Backbone Path Assignment Information saved in file DSGNPATH uk Average hops 2 21 Max hops 4 0 paths exceed hop limit of 8 Time for Design 3s 9 Els Total Link Cost 24 926BP Tip You can limit the number of potentially redundant links checked for removal in a greenfield or incremental basic design if you have a large network and the time needed for this step is a concern To do so before you begin the design you can select Tools gt Options gt Design and set Max Link Check in the Design Options window You can select None to prevent any such checking or specify Of Links followed by a number to limit the checking to that number Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 5 DESIGN 14 9 E1 cost 24976 Figure 14 4 Green Field Design Designs may vary All demands are placed but at a lower cost than the original design In this case compare 28 276 BP original and 24 926 BP new 13 Select File gt Save Network to save the entire design environment or File gt Save Network File gt Links to save only the new bblink file Give the spec file a new runcode such as greenfield 14 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DES
35. Expl Print multiple Sort A Restore M Select Columns E Script Help CnitryA Nid Nodeal CardA CntryZinved NodeZ CardZ Vendor Type _Monthly NRC Dist Mile CLASSA CLASSZ SIC LEC 34 615 415278 SFO 408731 OC3 72010 0 404724 ATL 281872 HOU 404724 ATL 213626 LAX 404724 ATL 703448 WDC 617661 BOS 248354 DET 617661 BOS 212924 NYC 312899 CHI 214951 DAL 312899 CHI 303458 DEN OC3 218754 918 693 312899 CHI 248354 DET OC3 104048 227 505 1 1 003182234 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 312699 CHI 703448 WDC 1 OC3 163310 0 584 893 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 1 0 OC3 386912 OC3 155010 Oc3 168954 OC3 197242 OC3 199830 698 852 1931 146 534 716 618 569 186 967 805 001 214951 DAL 281872 HOU O0C3 102056 215 263 303458 DEN 415278 SFO OC3 222904 943 399 281872 760277 SDG OC3 281170 1294 473 213626 760277 SDG OC3 83132 101 900 213626 408731 SJC OC3 118158 312 324 212924 215413 PHI OC3 79812 81 184 215413 703448 WDC OC3 175892 130 249 2511428 TOTAL d hs Filter L Search Ady Filter 1 18 displayed 1 1 page Go to page Lines Per Page 200 Set Figure 19 5 Report Viewer via File Manager Right click Menu For more details about the Report Viewer refer to The File Manager chapter of the Reference Guide Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 19 5 a 19 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADVANCED TRAFFIC GENERATION flows
36. Hardware Generic hardware devices include ATM Frame Relay IP router optical transport voice and TDM Supported devices and protocols are listed below grouped by hardware vendor The hardware vendors you can model in the WANDL software depend on your password file ALCATEL e ATM 7670 7470 5620 or PNNI based routing e 7750 Service Router CISCO SYSTEMS e Routers IOS and IOS XR based devices such as 7500 GSR12000 and CRS 1 e MPLS Tag Switching MPLS TE GB TE e PIX Firewall e LightStream 1010 e IGX 8400 BPX 8600 and MGX 8800 e ONS 15454 15327 15000 optical transport ECI TELECOM LTD e T DAX FORCE10 e Forcel0 Router FOUNDRY e NetIron IMR XMR Series HUAWEI e NE and AR Core Routers IBM e Nways 2220 JUNIPER NETWORKS e Routers JUNOS and JUNOSe based devices such as E including ERX 700 1400 J M T Series e NetScreen Firewall LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES ASCEND COMMUNICATIONS e B STDX e CBX 500 GX 550 MARCONI e ForeRunner ASX TNX NET COM e Micro20 IDNX20 70 90 e Promina 100 200 400 800 e FrameXpress CellXpress SCLX e SCREAM 50 100 e STM NORTEL e Multiservice Switch 6400 7400 15000 20000 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 1 5 e MPE 9000 Series RIVERSTONE e RS Router Family SYCAMORE e N3000 SN16000 SN16000SC TELLABS e 8800 Multi Service Router Series RAD e Megaplex Series IPmux Series Converting Your Files to WANDL File Format The following is a p
37. I 5 net com l 5 Nortel I 6 Riverstone I 6 Sycamore I 6 Tellabs I 6 RAD 1 6 Converting Your Files to WANDL File Format I 6 Extraction Tools for Topology and Provisioned Data I 6 Extraction Tools for Traffic Data I 6 1 Document Conventions 1 1 Document Conventions 1 1 Keyboard Window and Mouse Terminology and Functionality 1 1 The Keyboard 1 2 The Mouse 1 2 Information Labels 1 2 Changing the Size of a Window 1 2 Moving a Window 1 3 For Further Information 1 3 2 What is a Spec File 2 1 Prerequisites 2 1 Related Documentation 2 1 Definition of a Spec File 2 1 Spec File Format 2 1 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Contents 1 runcode 2 1 datadir 2 1 File Types 2 2 File Names 2 2 Creating Input Files 2 2 Example Set of Network Files 2 3 Adding Comments 2 4 Additional Notes 2 4 datadir Specifying the Location of Input Files 2 4 Making a Copy of a Spec File 2 5 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project 3 1 When to use 3 1 Prerequisites 3 1 Related Documentation 3 1 Recommended Instructions 3 1 Detailed Procedures 3 1 Open Network Project File 3 1 Close Network Project File 3 3 Accessing Recently Opened Project Files 3 4 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model 4 1 Definition of a spec file 4 1 When to use 4 1 Prerequisites 4 1 Recommended Instructions 4 1 Detailed Procedures 4 2 Creating a Spec File 4 2 Creating a Directory for Your Network 4 2 Create a Spec File 4 3 E
38. Max Mode 100 maxlink default 1 500 Minimum Max Link 1500 hardware type PASSPORT lt Back Load Network Help Figure l 3 Specfile Status Window In the Specfile Status window click on the Load Network button Press Yes to overwrite both the spec and dparam files The sample network will now be launched successfully 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Key Software Features This WANDL software is an integrated software package that addresses backbone topological design and simulation as well as maintenance issues using TDM multiplexers Routers Frame Relay switches and ATM switches Several hardware devices are currently modeled Capacity Planning The impact of adding new demands or traffic can be analyzed in a network and Topological model before they are placed onto the real network This WANDL software Design can determine whether there is sufficient available capacity in the network and recommend places where capacity should be added A network can be automatically designed based on end to end transmission bandwidth requirements starting from an existing set of backbone trunks Incremental Design or from scratch Green field Design Using powerful heuristic algorithms the WANDL software can evaluate whether trunks can be pruned from the network without compromising diversity constraints Potential bottlenecks are also easily detected Further analysis capabilities includ
39. Net Groom tool allows When to Use total path cost of the associated demands For many large networks and hardware configurations when a demand is rerouted due to a network failure the new route remains in use even when the network failure is resolved Thus after an extended period of time a suboptimal set of routes may evolve in the network In order to re establish an optimal set of routes for a network in this situation WANDL software has provided the Net Groom feature Prerequisites In order to use the Net Groom feature you must first have a network design with nodes links and demands placed The demands may have been placed by a previous design or their paths altered due to network failures Network grooming will find the optimal placement of demands using the current set of nodes and links in the network Note For MPLS enabled router networks only Network grooming of demand paths is not available if there are LSP tunnels in the network as LSP tunnels can affect the routes of demands However in this case network grooming can still be performed on LSP tunnel paths in Layer 2 The instructions in this chapter refers to demands and demand paths However the same applies to LSP tunnel paths J j Tunnel exists Layer 3 NetGrooming feature not supported Warning Figure 18 1 Net Groom not available for Demand paths if LSP Tunnels exist Related Documentation For more details about these windows refer to the General Refer
40. Paths Select q Quit Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 16 5 ne Option examines the path placement of all demands Option 2 examines the path placement for only unplaced demands To quit Tuning mode press q If either option or 2 is selected the user will be asked whether the user wants to use verbose mode Verbose Mode default no y n If the user enters y a detailed listing of all the changes made is displayed on the screen demandl N5 N13 9 6K R 06 086 N5 N4 N10 N8 N12 N14 N13 changed CO N5 N1 N8 N12 N14 N13 demand2 N3 N41 32K VD 07 07 N3 N4 N16 N17 N18 N41 changed to N3 N19 N18 N41 demand3 N3 N40 332R VDO 07707 N3 NLI N18 NI7 lt NLG N4 changed to N3 N4 N16 N40 Ifall the demands are placed the program displays the average hop If some demands are still not placed the program displays the index numbers of those paths Free run Path Placement Method If demands are not placed due to a lack of capacity select Free run mode to try to rearrange other demands to squeeze in room The program places the demands differently in each attempt in order to look for a better placement The user will be prompted for the number of iterations that is how many times the program should try to find a better placement The WANDL software will pick the best solution of the iterations performed If demands are still not placed the program can be instructed to do back tracking identify new
41. Runcade Spec File Data Directory Browse Rate Directory l u wandl dbiratesidefault Browse Figure 4 3 Spec File Generation window 7 Note that the Spec File Directory in the Spec File Generation window is the directory that your spec file will be saved to It is set to the Current Path in the File Manager window by default The directory can be changed by clicking the Browse button 8 Enter in a runcode file name extension for your spec file e g ex1 The spec file is automatically populated to be spec runcode where runcode is the file extension of choice 9 Note the Data Directory is set to by default This is the equivalent of the spec file directory and is the default location in which network files will be found in 10 Click on the Next gt button The Design Parameters tab is now activated as shown in Figure 4 4 Spec File Director fspacelmpls4 4fdatafexample General Design Parameters j amak riles Design Parameters File dparamex Browse Hardware Type ROUTER 7 Maximum Humber of Mades 100 Maximum Humber af Links 1500 Figure 4 4 Design Parameters Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 4 3 ee ne 4 4 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 First select a Hardware Type from the drop down box The available options will vary according to your license Next set the Max Node and Max Link parameters for your network
42. Simulation chapter and the File Format Guide Output Files chapter INTERPRETING THE LINK PEAK UTILIZATION REPORT 41 The following is an example of a Link Peak Utilization Report from an exhaustive single node and link failure in the fish network from the Simulation gt Predefined Scenarios window Some columns have been removed to highlight the key columns of this report Layer 3 Network Reports ET AVR 5 J Layer 3 Simulation Repi 2 Explan tion lt lt Multiple Sort Restore IT SelectColumns lt Refresh El Script Interactive en 2 Linkname Anode Znode Type TotalBw UsedBw PeakBw PeakUti SimType SimEvent Demand Peaktni Cnt_SimTlype Cnt_SimEvent Exhaustive Node Fai d ILINK7 CHI DET 0C3 155 520M 101 079M 252 153M 162 14 INEFAIL LINK14 40 72 NDFAIL WDC Exhaustive Single Li a ILINKS CHI WDC 155 520M 130 676M 250 931M 161 35 INEFAIL LINK2 3 LINEFAIL LINK2 Exhaustive Facility F4 LINK14 PHI N IOC3 155 520M 149 686M 249 727M INEFAIL LINK LINEFAIL LINK7 Exhaustive Link Fail I HI OC3 155 520M 105 868M 242 112M 155 68 INEFAIL LINK2 X INEFAI LINK2 L L Exhaustive Card Fail INK13 5JC OCS 155 520M 172 688M 241 878M INEFAIL 2 LINEFAIL LINKE L L 80 INDFAIL E 72 LINE lt 2 Exhaustive Voice Try 3 155 520M 67 912M 240 204M INEFAIL LINK 2 2 Random Daily Failu LINK3 DET _ BOS_ OC3 155 520M 79 417M 228 834M 147 14 _ LINEFA
43. Ta ee pe ZA Pull Pre Current Route Le onfigured Secondary Cunerl M 1 000M RM 2 LINK_N1_TO_N2 Mo Pret MONE N2 PS50 0K ann i 7 LINK NM2_TO_N3 No Pret MONE N2 N1 750 0 0 RNET Of OF LINK NT TO NZ No Pret MONE N3 N2 750 0K 0 R NRT 07 07 LINK _N2_TO_N3 Mo Pref NONE NS M1 750 0K 0 RNET 07 O7 LINK_N2_TO_N1 No Pref NONE Ni M2 750 0K 0 R NRT lor jor No Pref NONE Ni N3 750 0 K 0 F NRT l 07 07 LINK_N3_TO_M1 No Pref NONE Figure 8 15 One Unplaced Demands 40 In the Demands window take note of the Current Route column Right click a row for which no Current Route is displayed e g MyDmd 6 in this case and select Bottlenecks When you click on Bottlenecks the program will make a few attempts to route the demand Take a look at the Console window xax Bottle Necks for Path 6 Mybmd_ 5 L Ce ye la NzZ 2 CEvyeNLsSNo N2Z Searching for a path with the transit demand limit removed Failed to find path The Bottlenecks option can be used to detect the reason for failure in more complex scenarios In this example the reason that the demand is unable to route is simply due to insufficient bandwidth Note If you work out the path placement for all seven demands by hand on this simple network you might conclude that there is suffiicient bandwidth to place all demands However note that in this ATM network the BW specified e
44. This convention holds in general throughout the bbdsgn program Saving Keystrokes for Batch Mode The keystrokes used to run bbdsgn can be traced to a file by the program In the future you can then feed the keystrokes recorded in that file into bbdsgn In addition you can create an input file manually and record the keystrokes you would like to use to run bbdsgn TRACING INPUT 20 To trace the input navigate to the directory containing the spec file you want to run Then type u wandl bin bbdsgn specfilepath traceinput substituting specfilepath with the relative or absolute path of your spec file After your run the file input tre is created with your keystrokes recorded To avoid overwriting this file in another trace input session you can change the name of the file using the mv command For instance mv input trc tracel FEEDING KEYSTROKES 21 You can feed the keystrokes as an input using the lt pipe For example if your spec file is spec uk and your input trace file is named input trc you can type u wandl bin bbdsgn spec uk lt input trc 22 To save the output you can pipe the results into an output file using the gt pipe For example u wandl bin bbdsgn spec uk lt input trc gt myresults Note If you are logging into the server remotely and you wish for your process to run even if your connection is broken use the nohup command nohup u wandl bin bbdsgn spec uk lt input tre
45. User License Agreement EULA posted at http www juniper net support eula html By downloading installing or using such software you agree to the terms and conditions of that EULA Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc About the Documentation About the Documentation Documentation and Release Notes To obtain the most current version of all Juniper Networkse technical documentation see the product documentation page on the Juniper Networks website at http www juniper net techpubs If the information in the latest release notes differs from the information in the documentation follow the product Release Notes Juniper Networks Books publishes books by Juniper Networks engineers and subject matter experts These books go beyond the technical documentation to explore the nuances of network architecture deployment and administration The current list can be viewed at http www juniper net books Documentation Feedback We encourage you to provide feedback comments and suggestions so that we can improve the documentation You can provide feedback by using either of the following methods e Online feedback rating system On any page at the Juniper Networks Technical Documentation site at http www juniper net techpubs index html simply click the stars to rate the content and use the pop up form to provide us with information about your experience Alternately you can use the online feedback form at https www ju
46. Views Autogroud ward 04 2311 3 15 12 Save Map Setting xj i Mame Description OK Cancel Save Map W Load Map Clase Help i Figure 6 26 Map Views Opening Different Maps Note Performance may degrade as the number of simultaneously displayed views increases 78 Whether or not you can view multiple topology views at the same time may depend upon what network model you have and what password you have 79 For this example select the Network gt Maps gt Map BGP View menu 80 To find a particular window if there are too many windows open you can click on the Windows pull down main menu and select the relevant window from the menu Copy Map Layout 81 Sometimes the layout of the maps may appear differently and it can be difficult to correlate them to one another To copy the layout of one map and copy it to another map you may select from the Network gt Maps gt Copy Map Layout menu A selection window will appear as shown in Figure 6 27 Copy From To x i From To Map EGP View Map Standard Y Cancel Figure 6 27 Copy From To window 82 Inthe Copy From To window the user may select which map to copy the layout from and which map to apply the layout to In the example above we will apply the BGP map s layout to the standard map This is ideal if you make a lot of node rearrangements to one map and want the same rear
47. and or client in CSV XML and HTML formats as described in Saving Reports on page 19 5 4 Customize a report by selecting sorting and resizing columns and filtering report rows as described in Customizing the Report View on page 19 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 19 1 a Detailed Procedures Report Options 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Report to change report options The following window will be displayed as shown in the figure below Wandi Options General Config Editor Currency Table Design Device Runcode impls fish Discrete Event Simulation Custom Reports WOME Failure Simulation Hardware SRE Dont Care v He a Path Reference LSP Tunnel Attributes CT IP Address Map Preferences Node Reference Node Name Node ID Link Reference LinkName Node to Node Report Style Bandwidth Unit Formatted Text bit Kb csv Mb Best Fit gt HTML C cell 53 bytes Distance Unit Currency miles Country lus UNITED STATES Al O km Currency DL fi Figure 19 1 Report Options Here you can specify the runcode report style node and link identification formats and the units to use for bandwidth distance currency for the saved report file In particular note that the Link Reference will influence whether a path is displayed as a sequence of links or a sequence of nodes Additionally the default Report Style for the graphical user interface is CSV
48. back to NONE after populating the fields Service Profile A service profile is a collection of service types that are distributed by each of the weights This module allows you to generate demands of these service aggregates according to how commonly they appear in the network traffic Before creating any service profiles make sure you have existing service types 35 Switch to Modify mode on your network and select Modify gt More gt Service Profile 36 A Service Profile window will appear that will list any existing service profiles in the top pane and the service types belonging to that profile in the bottom pane 37 To add a new service profile click on the Add button An Add Service Profile window will appear that will allow you to enter the service profile details Enter a unique profile name and specify the service types and their percentages in this profile by double clicking on the Percentage field in each row If you do not wish to include a particular service type in the profile simply leave the percentage at zero 0 0 When complete click OK Services Types Profile profile Percentage 10 0 40 0 40g o y A A Figure 10 12 Add Service Profile window Note In the case that the percentages do not all add up to a full 100 the program will automatically recalculate to normalize the distribution and assign the correct percentages according to the values given For example a prof
49. be integrated into the WANDL software suite to price out lines This is used extensively in the program s heuristic least cost design algorithms The savings reaped normally translate to a quick return on investment Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 1 3 Feature Description Carrier Co This feature also termed LSA can be used to evaluate whether additional location savings may be achieved by co locating the hardware with an IXC s POPs The additional savings are realized in eliminating one or both of the local loop components from the private line calculation Detailed Design As with all modules detailed reports are generated to help you to quickly and Analysis assess and summarize network related data These reports include trunk Reports pricing trunk utilization and demand paths Reports can be generated in text format CSV comma separated format or web friendly HTML Detailed Topology Detailed topology views allow you to view your network nodes and links Views These can be placed by geographical location rearranged by hand or automatically rearranged in a format that distributes the points to make the network easier to view Planned utilization link vendors and other attributes can be viewed by color hardware devices are represented by various icons From the topology map popup menus can be accessed by right clicking on nodes or links providing quick targeted access to information about the selected netw
50. bottle necks and try again The following is an example of selecting option 2 Free run from the Tuning mode screen Placement Method Free run Pre assigned paths might be affected Enter Iteration Count for Free run 3 Print Unsuccessful Paths y n n Iteration 1 Path s Not Placed 13 bw 731200 Iteration 2 Path s Not Placed 12 bw 603200 Iteration 3 Path s Not Placed 12 bw 603200 SOLUTION Path s Not Placed 12 best 12 paths bw 603200 not placed Do backtracking on the solution obtained y n y Enter iteration count 3 Iteration 1 Path s Not Placed 12 bw 603200 Iteration 2 Path s Not Placed 13 bw 731200 Iteration 3 Path s Not Placed 12 bw 603200 SOLUTION Path s Not Placed 12 best 12 paths bw 603200 not placed Do backtracking on the solution obtained y n In the above example 12 circuits are not placed Type n to stop the search for a better placement Place Path s y n Type n to display the Path Placement Menu To interrupt the program during the selection process press the stop button at the top of the window The program will ask the user whether to stop If the user responds y the program will keep the best result up to that point If all the demands are placed the average and maximum hops of the paths are displayed The solution with the minimum number of average hops is selected Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc PATH PLACEMENT
51. by a link name optional From_Location To_Location Vendor number of trunks and trunk type Figure 4 5 Specify Network Files Locate the file type you want to include in your network model Most likely it is in the top category Backbone Files Select the row will the file you want to add For the selected row there are two ways to specify the chosen file You can type the new path in the textbox given at the bottom of the window absolute path or relative path starting from the Data Directory on the General tab Alternatively click Browse to navigate to that file and click Select This will display the file in the textbox Click the load button with the blue arrow icon to specify a file If you change your mind and want to erase that file click the Remove button with the brush icon Click Finish The following Specfile Status window will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc CREATING amp EDITING A NETWORK MODEL Field Filename Status Plew specfile spec ex runcode ex datadir ratedir hwandiidbirate sidetault dparam dparam ext maxnode 100 maxlink 1500 hardware type ROUTER Back Load Network Help Figure 4 6 Specfile Status window Note Note that in the Status column you will be able to see whether your file is new or whether it will overwrite a preexisting file If it will overwrite a preexisting file the status will be
52. can be based Note The custom rates feature requires a special license For more information please contact Juniper Using the custom rates feature the final recurring charge e g monthly charge for a link is calculated according to the following formula Recurring charge Fixed_cost Inc_cost Inc_dist link_airline_distance where the value of Inc_cost and Fixed_cost the incremental and fixed costs respectively are taken from the distance band that applies for the link 2 3 Switch to the Modify action mode Now define custom rate classes These will be used to classify different nodes in the network Select Modify gt More gt Custom Rates gt Add Modify Classes to open the following window Custom Rate Classes Custom Rate Classes Classes ame ree Figure 12 1 Modify Custom Rate Classes Press the Add button to get the following prompt 4dd New Class Enter the new Class name Y us o Cancel Figure 12 2 Add New Class Enter a name for this class of node and then click OK In this particular example the class name US was chosen to represent nodes in the United States with the intent of using different pricing schemes for links between different countries or regions To specify this class for nodes select Modify gt Elements gt Nodes Filter or select the nodes you wish to classify as US and click Modify In the Custom Rate Class field of the Advan
53. checking or specify Of Links followed by a number to limit the checking to that number Note that this needs to be done before running the diversity design 26 Select File gt Save Network and follow the instructions in the console to save the design environment or File gt Save Network File gt Links to save only the new link file Give the spec file a meaningful new runcode such as divdsgn 27 Now try a diversity design from scratch using the same nodes by selecting Design gt Reset Clear Links and then Design gt Backbone Diversity Design Note that the cost 31 497 BP is actually slightly more expensive than the previous incremental diversity design 30 878 BP Typically it is not recommended to do a diversity design from scratch Each deletion of a node and or link will take longer because of all the failure Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN simulation analysis that must be done Hence if you are starting from scratch it is better to first do a basic design before trying a diversity design 28 Select Design gt Prune Link to check whether a specific link can be deleted without violating diversity design constraints Click on a link s source node on the map and then the link s destination node on a map The program will either delete the link or tell the user why it cannot be deleted e g violation of site or link diversity See the Console message for details 29 Right click on the map to end the
54. directory you can type in the directory path after Current Path and press lt Enter gt Note that this field is like the Unix file system case sensitive Alternatively you can press the Up icon to go up a directory or double click on a folder to look inside a directory Finally you can use the navigation tree in the left pane of the File Manager or pick a recently visited directory from the drop down menu by clicking on the arrow to the right of the Current Path field 2 Select the spec file you wish to open For this tutorial the MPLS Fish router sample network will be used By default it is located in u wandl sample IP fish spec mpls fish Note If you have an ATM password license as opposed to a router password license you can try opening u wandl sample original atm uk spec uk If you encounter an error when trying to open the spec file open the dparam uk default parameters file and search for the Hardware Related Parameter line that says hwvendor GENATM You may not have the Generic ATM hardware vendor in your password license Simply replace Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 3 1 OPENING AND CLOSING A NETWORK PROJECT GENATM with a hardware vendor listed in your password license located in u wandl db sys npatpw and save the dparam file Now you should be able to open the spec file 3 Specify the Output Path if it is different from the spec file s directory path The Output Path is the directory
55. for Comma Separated format and is necessary to view reports in the Report Manager in table format Note The Formatted Text report style may not have all the information that the CSV report has because of limitations caused by this report style Click Cancel to close this window without making changes Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc REPORT MANAGER Navigating the Report Manager 2 Select Report gt Report Manager to view the Report Manager A Report Manager E Network Reports EC Demand Reports 4 Demand Path amp Diversity CoS Demands Demand Route Cost Equal Cost Multi Path Link Reports __ Interface Traffic LULL E TI Ea 4 Protocols JL Voice over IP Tunnel Layer Network Reports Simulation Reports CI Network Statistics C1 Detailed Simulation Ca Upper Laver Simulation Tunnel Layer Simulation Reports Configuration Reports Customized Reports Ke Ea EH C1 Ca LJ Ca C2 Figure 19 2 Report Manager Note that the contents will vary with the opened network s hardware type and the user s license file For router networks Tunnel Layer Network Reports or Layer 3 Network Reports will be displayed under the Tunnel Layer Network Reports folder 3 The main categories of reports include the following e Network Reports Includes details about demands links interfaces group nodes network services and network protocols For router networks Tunnel Layer reports will be d
56. get first allows you to pick only a subset of the current paths Apply Changes to 1 Primary only 2 Secondary Standby only 3 All before asking you to choose what to set the current paths to Note that in the case that you have router hardware your changes only apply to the current layer of 2 for tunnels or 3 for demands 15 Select 1 or 2 depending on if you want to make the current paths preferred or required Select 3 to cancel from this menu Afterward the number of demands with Preferred Required Path setting will be updated in the Preferred Path Modification Menu Note If you want to require certain of the paths in a category preferred required all and not all you must manually change the type field parameter for those paths by modifying the type field for those demand entries 16 If you select a category with a positive number of demands you have a choice of making modifications The choice may be to remove the path select setting and or to switch from path select to required or from path required to path select You can choose to make changes for only the primary paths or only the secondary standby paths or both SAVING PATH PLACEMENT INFORMATION 17 You can use the File gt Save Network File gt Demands option to save only the path placement information to a file This file can be used in future runs However when you reroute the demands from scratch the paths may be changed based on the routing method and placement o
57. impact of metric changes on the traffic routes Note that you can also modify link metrics from the Modify Links window Protocols tab in modify mode for the active protocol specified in the Design Options window Path Placement option pane Related Documentation To automate link metric changes to reduce link congestion refer to the Metric Optimization chapter of the Router Guide Recommended Instructions 1 Open a router network with OSPF or ISIS and run the Route Optimization wizard Detailed Procedures The following steps indicate how to experiment with manual metric changes To automate the process of metric optimization to reduce the worst link utilization refer to the Metric Optimization chapter of the Router Guide USING THE ROUTE OPTIMIZATION WIZARD 1 In Design mode select Design gt TE Tunnels gt Route Optimization or Design gt Demands gt Route Optimization for demands to open the Route Optimization wizard a x Route Optimization Welcome to the WANDL Route Optimization Wizard A NJ REA NETWORK O amp BIGN This Wizard will guide you through the following steps l Modify link metrics 2 View all demands that have changed routes as a result of the modified link metrics 3 Choose to save or abandon changes to link metrics and demand routes Figure 17 1 Route Optimization Wizard 2 Click Next to continue The following window will display the links in your network and their li
58. is selected a window like the following will appear Demand Path Selection N1 to N7 Current Node N1 Circuit ID ckt3 Next Available Hop s 4 Node IDiName LinkName Loose Route Link Name Link Type Node ID Node Name IP Address Interface IP Hardware Eil 0 0 0 0 MUX g N3 DUDLEY UNDEF g BIRMINGH UNDEF 0 0 0 0 MUX gg ABERDEEN UNDEF 0 0 0 0 MUX g GATWICK UNDEF 0 0 0 0 MUX g Add to Path C IP Ac ss Hop Disp Opt ID Name Only elete trom Path Clear Selections ddre ei ID Name Defined Path Link Nare LinkType Node ID Node Name _IP Address Interface IP Hardware m Figure 9 14 The Configure Route window You can bring up the topology map to aid in selecting the paths in this window since the map may be able to help you visualize the paths from point to point To select a path from one point to another select a link from the list in the top section and click the Add to Path button Once the user has added the link to the route the program will display the choices for the next logical path segment from that point Continue this process until the path reaches its destination Note that you can click on Delete from Path at any time to undo the last added link Once the end of path has been reached you can proceed to add this route to the demand Click on the OK button in both the pop
59. menu for the following window 9 4 shown in Figure 9 7 Demands Actions ID NodeDetailA Me BY ALB ZA Type_AZ Type_ZA Pril Pre Current_Route Configured Seconda Drnd_N1_to_N2 1 000M 0 R NRT 02 LINK_N1_TO_N2 No Pref MyDmd1 1750 0K RNRT 07 LINK_N2_TO_N3 No Pref MyDmd_2 750 0K RNRT 07 LINK_N1_TO_N2 No Pref MyDmd_3 750 0K RNRT 07 LINK_N2_TO_N3 No Pref MyDmd_4 F50 0K RNRT 07 LINK_N3_TO_N1 No Pref MyOmd_6 1750 0K R NRT 07 LINK_N1_TO_N2 No Pref MyDmd_6 R NRT 07 LINK N3_TO_N1 No Pref M Demands Type Total BW Placed BW Voice 0 0 Data 5 500M 5 500M Other Nodes Statistics View Unplaced BW Disabled BW 0 0 0 Figure 9 6 Demands window in Modify mode 17 Click the Filter button al to bring up the Find Demands window Filter through the list for only placed demands at node N1 with a bandwidth of 750K e Uncheck the Unplaced and Deactivated items in the Status section of the window e After BW select from the select menu and type in 750K in the textbox immediately to the right of the select menu In the section titled Select choose in the first select box labelled From the option Node Then select node N1 in the select box immediately underneath it See the Find Demands window in Figure 9 7 Traffic Type v
60. model or use the default These two parameters are used by the program to allocate memory efficiently and can only be changed when a network is not in session A good rule of thumb is to set the numbers according to the planned number of nodes and links in the network leaving some room for growth Note that the Max Node parameter should not exceed the node limit of your license file u wandl db sys npatpw Additionally setting it too high may use up too much memory For the Max Link parameter keep in mind that during a backbone design session no additional links will be added when Max Link is reached Note that the hardware type will only display your licensed hardware vendor types Note also that you can click on Reset Dparam File to reset these parameters to their default values Click Next to continue If you have preexisting network data arranged according to WANDL file format they can be specified on the Network Files tab Otherwise skip to step 18 on page 4 4 You can create WANDL files later or add nodes links demands through the graphical user interface after loading the network model Spec File Directory Jexporthome mplsview samplefrouterfish new General Design Parameters Network Files ER El Backbone Files bblink demand domainfile facilityfile graphcoord group muxloc hewdemand nodeparam owner site Bhlink contains backbone link information far the network Each link entry is defined
61. nodes should foll LINK4 rule Link does not match the templ links between cisco and juniper nodes should foll LINK10 rule Link should not exist parameter of orange should not connect to para LINKS rule Link should not exist parameter of orange should not connect to para Fite _Q Search 1 9 displayed 1 1 page 4 gt Go to page C amp Lines Per Page 200 Set Detail Link LINKS does not match template Default runk type is OCS Trunk type should be Tl Figure 11 12 Link Rules Integrity Check Report 24 Click on any row to see a more detailed explanation in the bottom panel Link Rules are saved in the linkrules file The format is as follows NameNodeARuleNodeZRuleBetweenNodeRulesMaxDistLinkTemplate rulelANY HW TYPE CISCOANY HW TYPE JUNIPER ALL NODEA HW LEVEL NODEZ HW LEVEL NODEA SITE NODEZ SITEODefault links between cisco and juniper nodes should follow default template rule2ANY parameter2 orangeANY parameterl 10NONE0NoOne parameter2 of not orange connect to parameterl of 10 should not exist Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING LINK PRICING his chapter is a tutorial on how to use the pricing features of the WANDL software The user can take advantage of a standard database or specify pricing rules in accordance with the WANDL file formats When to use In the WANDL software pricing information is taken into account whe
62. not want touched You can create this file from a telnet window or a server console window This file needs to be on the server machine If you create it on a different machine you can try to ftp it to the server machine Tip In older versions if there is a unique link name for every link entry in the bblink file you can add a link to the fixlink file by performing a grep and piping the results to the end of the fixlink file e g grep IkOS gt gt fixlink x but this should be exercised with care since you will get any line containing the string you are grepping For example you may get lines with Ik052 with the above command Also users may accidentally overwrite the fixlink file if they leave out the second gt symbol in gt gt 45 Select Tools gt Options gt Design and then select the checkbox Yes where it says Activate Fixed Links 46 The fixlink file that the user creates can then be read in using File gt Load Network Files before the design is performed Go to the Network Files tab Click on fixlink in the Control Files section Then select Browse to specify the usercost file location and select the Load button Ls to read in the fixlink file Afterward you can perform a design and the fixed links will not be removed even if they are unnecessary to route the demands with no oversubscription USING THE USERCOST FILE 47 Furthermore the user can create modify the usercost file on the se
63. of the file you wish to compare with as shown in Figure 21 5 Compare With Select a revision to compare with demand hpnni r1 2 r1 1 o X on ces Figure 21 5 Compare With window after selecting Compare the selection with revision 11 Select the revision file you wish to compare with and click OK 12 The Revision Manager window should now display the two versions side by side in a table display as shown in Figure 21 9 21 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc FILE COMPARISON TOOLS ERevision Manager NPAT WANDL file Revision 1 demand hpnni r1 3 2 demand hpnni r1 4 fy 74 bblink hpnni _Demandid NodeA _NodeZ Demandid NodeA Nodez _ CJ demand hpnni APRATIAT1_1 RA11A1 1_1 A BEE PA1 1A1 2 2 A RA11A1 2_2 7 D12 JRA11A1 3_3 B13 ARAI1A21_4 01 4 RAT1A22 5 current RA11A 2 3_6 CI demand hpnni aggregated ARATIAST 7 CJ dparam hpnni RA 1 1A 3 2_8 JA i orhon RA11A 3 3_9 CA muxloc hpnni CJ nodeparam hpnni H 4l f l gt I gt i 32 differences Last updated July 9 2002 1 36 20 PM EDT as Figure 21 6 Comparing version r1 3 to r1 4 of demand hpnni Continue in the steps below to learn how to view this side by side difference window and use the function buttons on the bottom section of the window Both Tools The rest of this chapt
64. only design for two backbone types at a time one for the regular backbone nodes Backbone Type and one for the core backbone nodes Core Backbone Type Whether a node is a core node or a regular node can be set in the node properties hierarchy level field see the Advanced Properties tab of any Modify Node window Hence you can have the program buy higher capacity links between core nodes and lower capacity links between regular nodes In this example all nodes are classified as Regular 8 Alternatively even if all your routers are regular nodes and not core nodes you can generate a design that contains more than one link type by trying one of the following e You can start with a higher capacity trunk by choosing a bigger Backbone Type in the Design Options and running a design Then you can use the Design gt Backbone gt Resize option to see if you can resize the trunk to one with a lower capacity You can specify the candidate trunk types to be used as well as a penalty for adding additional trunks This is the preferred method e Alternatively you can first specify a lower capacity trunk for the Backbone Type in the design options and perform a design Then select a higher capacity trunk from the design options and perform another design Note however that the higher capacity trunk will only be added if there is some bandwidth you could not handle with the lower capacity trunk assuming your hardware supports the
65. performed with the mouse e Point Position a mouse pointer cursor on an object e Click Quickly press and release the left mouse button without moving the mouse pointer e Right click Quickly press and release the right mouse button without moving the mouse pointer e Double click Quickly click a mouse button twice in succession without moving the mouse pointer e Press Hold down the mouse button Unless otherwise specified the left mouse button is implied e Release Release a mouse button after it has been pressed e Drag Move the mouse while a mouse button is pressed and an item is selected Information Labels Information labels are special notes placed in a document to alert you of an important point or hazard This document makes use of the following information label Note Emphasizes an important step or special instruction Notes also serve as supplemental information about a topic or task Changing the Size of a Window 1 2 You can change the size of many of the WANDL windows with some exceptions such as dialog boxes by pointing to a border or corner of the window s frame pressing the left mouse button and dragging the window s frame until the window has reached the size and you want it to be You also can click on the minimize maximize and exit buttons in the upper right hand portion of the window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS E Figure 1 3 Minimize Window B
66. retrieve network information Also note that certain features are device specific Therefore while the overall interface is similar what you see will vary according to your network s hardware type and or your WANDL license file Prerequisites You should have started up the WANDL software and opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You should also have a basic overview of the topology map features as described in Chapter 6 Using the Topology Windows Related Documentation How to view site and owner information is explained in the Chapter 10 Modifying Sites Owners Etc For information on how to view custom rate information please see Chapter 12 Modifying Link Pricing Although it is a chapter on modification the interface is very similar Some of the other features not mentioned may be device specific modules Please refer to the separate document relevant to the modules you have You may also want to refer to the General Reference Guide s Network chapter Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the process of viewing network information and the associated recommended detailed procedures This tutorial uses the sample network specification file u wandl sample IP fish spec mpls fish If you do not have the required passwords to use this example you may edit the network project as described in Following Along with the Examples in this Manual on page I 1 Note
67. the bottom bar as well as how it is formatted Bottom Bar Node Labels Map Standard All Keys Selected Key s IP_Address Custom_Rate_Class Delay Easting Fail 0 Gateway H Hardware Hierarchy_Level ID IP_Address Lat Lata Lon Max_Transit Demand_Bvy Max_Transit_Demand_Cou Max_Trunk_BYyY Multicast NPA xl Output Format value value O Key value Key value O value value O Key value Key value value value value 4 value 4 key value 4 key value 4 Figure 6 9 Node Labels Window 24 Select Links Customize from the submenu to get a similar pop up window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 7 ee ees Displaying Geographical Maps 25 To see a country map with this network model choose Country Maps from the right click menu of the topology view pane country Maps ed E _ Countries CI U S States Ci U S Counties 1 U 8 LATA Canadian Provinces C Australian States _ Chinese Taiwanese Counties LatLon Lines C Cities up to Clear OK Cancel Figure 6 10 Choose Map s Window 26 Select the maps that you wish to display You can also specify how many cities to display on the map as well as draw latitude and longitude lines Then click OK Note To arrange devices in their proper geographical locations as assigned in the muxloc file select Reset by Lat Lon from the Layout subm
68. the last image in Figure 6 38 for an example Note For some versions it may be necessary to set up Visio to run macros with Visual Basic for Applications VBA If the version of Visio has not been set up properly WANDL will not appear in the Macros menu OD 33 coo 004 33 Ga Title 18 link cost 281 2424 Title f r ae 18 link cost 2812424 T 26 1606 a Title 18 link cost 2812424 B Jafe v fa u pfe FURIE RUE FEE AJB ey s oie EN CR CECE CELAL Le Ne Figure 6 38 Portrait to Landscape Conversion followed by setting link colors curvatures Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ee HANDLING GROUPS 112 If the export includes expanded groups the discs will appear in Visio Sometimes the discs lie on top of nodes and links hiding them And if the discs are all the same color and there are groups within groups it may be difficult to see the lower level discs To fix this you may want to adjust the coloring of large groups and or send them to the back In order to send multiple discs back all at one time you can select multiple discs before performing the desired option To select one or more discs click on the first one then shift click on the others they will be outlined in light blue Then press lt F3 gt to fill or lt Ctrl gt b Visio 2000 and earlier or lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt b Visio 2002 to send to back While the network el
69. through the process of creating a traffic profile 2 The first window of the wizard describes the steps involved in creating a traffic profile Please read through these steps to gain a general understanding of the flow of the Traffic Generation Wizard Welcome to the Traffic Generation Wizard Gi i Trafic generation wizard overview WA N D RES NETWORK DESIGN LABORATORY E Traffic Generation Wizard This Wizard will guide you through the process of generating a traffic profile This process consists of three steps Step 1 Configure source and destination Load inputfile optional Select sources destinations and weights Step 2 Configure demands Specify direction full duplex simples Specify pairing full mesh identical diverse Specify total amount of traffic Configure individual demand properties Step 3 Save and finish Specify a name for the traffic profile Generate and load the demand file in the current network optional Figure 20 2 Traffic Generation Wizard Overview 3 At this point traffic can be read in from a file or configured through the next few windows in the wizard Three file formats are accepted as indicated in screenshot below Hover the mouse over one of the file icons to see a popup description of that file type Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 20 3 ADVANCED TRAFFIC GENERATION amp Traffic Generation Wizard OAS NETWORK DESIGN LABOAA
70. to which generated reports and trace files will automatically be saved Note The Output Path field cannot be changed while a network is open If you wish to save automatically generated reports but your current spec file is in a read only directory you must change the Output Path field to specify a directory to which you have write permission Otherwise the program will not be able to write automatically generated reports to the chosen directory 4 Double click the spec file Alternatively right click on a selected spec file and choose Open or Spec File gt Load Spec 5 Informational messages will scroll on the Console window while the network files are being loaded Check these messages for input file integrity check errors You may be prompted with the following dialog box shown below This dialog box normally shows up for router networks nio x Total Demand Count 182 Unplaced 0 Route Unplaced Demands O Reroute all Demands C Do not change routing _K Figure 3 1 Update Demand Paths e Selecting Do not change routing will cause the WANDL software to route the end to end demands according to any paths already defined in the demand file e Selecting Route Unplaced Demands will cause unplaced demand paths to be placed from scratch All other demands will be routed according to their previously defined routes e Selecting Route all Demands will cause all demand paths to be placed from scratch Not
71. to update and to modify the resulting trunk type or count as desired Once the checkbox is selected under Resize the NewType and NewCount columns will become modifiable for that row For example the user could change AGGRIG to AGGR2G 14 14 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN 42 Select Resize Selected Links to update the rows which have been updated or Cancel to return to the previous menu 43 When all the desired changes have been made select Quit Influencing the Design There are many ways to influence the design process These include specifying that certain links are not to be deleted specifying actual costs reserved bandwidth administrative weights on links node weights node capacity and various other factors Note that some of these are artificial not related to the hardware and mainly for the purpose of influencing the design to encourage or discourage making link purchases in specific places USING THE FIXLINK FILE 44 There are various ways in which the design can be influenced by the user Besides setting demand priorities and manually adding or deleting links the user can also specify a fixlink file to specify which links not to remove when redundant links are removed In this file for each link that is not to be touched copy the same link entry from the bblink file into the fixlink file You can simply copy the bblink file to the fixlink file and delete all the lines except those with links you do
72. up window and the configure route window to add the new demand to the network 9 8 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING SITES OWNERS ETC specify which nodes belong to them It also describes how to set the admin weight for links and create and T his chapter is a continuation of the modification features It describes how to add sites and owners and specify different service types for demands When to use Use these procedures after creating the muxloc file to perform further modifications on your network model Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you must have created a spec file as described in Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model or opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You then should continue with these procedures to modify a spec file Related Documentation For an overview of the WANDL software or for a detailed description of each feature and the use of each window refer to the General Reference Guide Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the network modification process and the associated recommended procedures Creating a Site on page 10 2 Create a site and assign nodes to the site Creating Owners on page 10 4 Create an owner and specify that owner for a subset of the demands Admin Weight Metric Rules on page 10 6 Add modify or delete a new Admin Weight Metric rule for links Service Type on pa
73. which in this case is x Saving to the current runcode will overwrite and update your existing network files If you do not want to overwrite existing network files specify a new runcode Your new spec file will now contain more detailed file specifications for the newly added nodes links demands and other information you have just specified through the WANDL client The network input files can also be created using the editor in the File Manager Example file templates can be found in the File Manager right click menu s New submenu or the File Format Guide Alternatively you may use an editor of your choice For the Unix server you may directly create the file via an editor made available in the console window or telnet session e g vi emacs and use awk to manipulate your files For your client machine you may also use a third party editor e g Notepad or Microsoft Excel and then copy paste the information into the File Manager or ftp it to the server machine If using copy paste you may want to check that the save buffer size 1s large enough by checking the saved file Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc WHAT IS A SPEC FILE EXAMPLE SET OF NETWORK FILES Filename spec x runcode x dparam dparam x muxloc muxloc x nodeparam nodeparam x bblink bblink x dparam dparam x Filename dparam x hwvendor GENERIC Filename muxloc y ATL ATLANTA 404 72 BOS BOSTON 617 661 CHI CHICAGO 312 899 Filename nodeparam x A
74. 000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 Total 529 item s of circuit 1058 BY 10580000000 Mm Mm IR IN IR IN IN IR IN IR IR IR IR IR IR IR IR RO Selection Criteria Node A Node Z Service ALL ALL ALL v Recalculate Revision Manager i CO Figure 21 13 Aggregated Demand File for demand jk1 11 The Selection Criteria section allows the user to filter through the list to view only aggregated demands by originating node NodeA terminating node NodeZ and service type When the criteria have been selected click on Recalculate to filter those demands Comparing Two Arbitrary WANDL Files This feature allows the user to compare two arbitrary Wandl formatted files that are not listed in the file comparison windows 12 To access this feature right click on the left pane of the File Comparison window or right click on the left pane of the Revision Manager window and go to the Compare submenu 13 From that menu select Compare two WANDL files 14 A Select file to be compared window will appear as shown in Figure 21 14 that wil allow you to traverse through different directories to select the two files to be compared 21 8 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc FILE COMPARISON TOOLS Select Two WANDL files to be compa
75. 0000 Figure 15 7 Changed Links 25 Select View Changes gt View Demand Changes to see the impact of the simulation upon the demand routing delay and path cost Select View Changes gt View Demand Changes to see the impact of the simulation upon the tunnel routing delay and path cost L Changed Demands ee Name NodeA Nodez New Path Orig Path New Path Cost Orig Path Cost New Hops Orig Hops O rig Delavin ew Delay Dela Change WASHDC flow13 ATLANTA ATL ATL WDC 683 1 flow18 BOSTON HOUSTON BOS DET CHI DAL HOU BOS DET CHE WDC AT 3561 5792 ra 18 68 70 04 flow19 BOSTON LOSANGE BOS DET CHI DAL HOU BOS DET CHI WDC AT 6637 7354 39 00 3265 83 73 flow22 BOSTON SANDIEGO BOS DET CHI DAL HOU BOS DET CHI VWDC AT 6374 17617 40 02 31 63 79 05 flow23 BOSTON SANFRAN BOS DET CHI DEN SFO _ BOS DET CHI WDC AT 6370 18134 42 47 27 10 63 82 flow24 BOSTON SANJOSE BOS DET CHI DEN SFO S BOS DET CHI WWDC AT 6460 8044 42 12 27 45 65 16 Figure 15 8 Changed Demands Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 15 7 SIMULATION 15 Simulation Scenarios Scripted simulations are predefined simulation scenarios Scripts provide a quick and easy way for the user to test the network s resiliency in various scenarios For each script a failure report is automatically generated 26 Select Sim
76. 2 1 264G 5 36 000M Demands Ma AIghlignt Highlight All Figure 7 1 Network Summary This window provides you with a high level understanding of your network including the hardware type cost number of nodes and links average and maximum hops of demands and a breakdown in total number of demands and total demand bandwidth according to whether a demand is placed unplaced or deactivated 7 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION Node Link and Demand Queries 3 To retrieve more detailed network information for nodes links and demands select the Nodes item from the Summary window s left pane Alternatively use the Network gt Elements menu items for Nodes Links and Demands For example select the Network gt Elements gt Nodes to display the existing nodes in the network i Network Inf HE Network Mame Hardware Lata Count IP Address Zz 1 LONDON ML CCC LINOEF ez CE LYMOUTH UK UNDEF E DUDLEY T e fn Jon Ms IRMINGH MUX 0999999 UK UNDEF E NS INEWCAST MUX o p99 a99 UK UNDEF C E CE es UE Fiter O OS Re OS A amp MS sofedisplayed ae General Advanced Design Protocols UserParameters Modes Properties Location Demands Country UE NPANKX Lata 999909 0 Lat Lon 51 5 0 166944 YH EPH 527 180 Other Modes oa Highlight Highlight All Figure 7 2 View Nodes Window 4 Similarly try s
77. 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Per A 200 500 300 400 500 500 300 400 200 200 300 300 200 400 300 300 200 100 300 AW Gain 300 100 200 200 0 0 Orig Path MNT 7 M25 M2 H5 M Ma M4 M M1 3 M1O Ma M4 M M1 M3 M M9 H6 M M1 2 M11 MN9 H6 M M4 H6 M M4 H6 M MNS H6 M MNS H6 M M2 H9 M M2 H9 M M1 6 M2B ME M18 MB N18 M1 1 Ma Best Path N17 M1B N2 N1 de N3 N4 N me N41 3 11 0 2 N3 N1 de N1 N3 M N9 N6 N et Nd 2h11 168 N9 NE N23 N4 NB N23 N4 NB M NS N6 N NS NE N23 N2 N9 N N2 N9 N M1 6 N21 MB M23 MB N23 M11 M8 cktgdd4 7 RIVENDELL MULANIA 415 760K 600 400 200 400 M1 M3 M INT N3 M lt e Total of records 51 records stan end indices 1 51 Optimize Selected Demands Optimize All View Paths View Report Figure 18 6 Net Groom Window After Optimization 16 At this point the optimal placement of the demands have been calculated and their paths are displayed in the Net Groom window You can sort the rows based on each individual column by clicking on the desired column header The Net Groom window displays only 100 demands at a time In order to sort all demands including those not shown in the current Net Groom window right click in the window and select Glob
78. 21 3 Be Select Modify gt Elements gt Demands Add gt One Demand or Add gt Multiple Demands to add one ore more demands to the network Then select the Modify gt Elements gt Demands window to modify an existing demand and delete a demand 6 Switch out of Modify mode and go to File menu and select Save Network Save with the same runcode as before 7 Go back to your Revision Manager window and double click on the demand file Select the current file and right click on it A right click window will appear as shown in Figure 21 4 Compare H Compare the selection with revision Compare the selection with file Compare two VWANDL files Check In Check In All VWWANDL files Figure 21 4 Right Click Menu Under File Panel 8 Select Check in to check in the newest versions of the demand file to the repository Selecting Check in All WANDL files will check in and update the newest versions of all the input files Then the window will refresh itself Note You may also remove the last checked in revision file by selecting from the right click menu Remove the last checkin Note that you may not remove any files prior to the last checked in file 9 Double click on the demand file again to view the new list of revision files 10 Select the newest version and right click on it Select Compare gt Compare the selection with revision A Compare With window will appear that allows you to select the version
79. A Conditions This tab lists all the conditions that a node on one side of the link must match Node Z Conditions This tab lists all the conditions that the node on the other side of the link must match Node A Node Z This tab lists all the relations that the two nodes must Relation match Match any all of the Determines whether all of the conditions relations in teh following current tab much match or any of the conditions relations Add Row Adds a row to specify another condition Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USER PARAMETERS AND LINK RULES Deletes the corresponding row and condition Require links created Links matching all the conditions and relations should during a design to use have the same properties as the selected Link the template Template Those matching links with properties differing from the selected link template will be listed in the Link Rules Integrity Check Report Forbid the creation of Links matching all the conditions and relations should links between the not exist in the network and will be listed in the Link nodes during a design Rules Integrity Check Report 22 Fill in the desired fields and options Click Add Row to add a line where you can specify a condition or relation by choosing items from the drop down menu or typing into a text field Multiple conditions can be defined within each tab if needed Switch between the tabs to define the different sets of conditions and rela
80. Auto Design to design the paths for all diverse groups 22 To view all the diversity groups select View Tune Paths Mare F ath lt ath Name D iv Type D Level Current Fathi Current Pathe RBOSWOC RBOSWOC RBOSWOC Standby SIT BOS DET CHI W0C BOS MYC PHI WDC RIVWOCBOS RVWOCBOS RVWOCBOS Standby JE RATLCHI RATLCHI Standby SITE RHONC RHONE Standby SITE RSJCCHI RoJCCHI Standby SITE WOC HI DET B0S ATL HOL DAL CHI IHOU DAL CHI WDC WDC PHI NYC B08 ATL WiDC CHI HOU ATL DC owC LAA S0G HOW DAL CHI SJC SF O DEN CHI Total of records 4 Filter Tune Selected Tune All Show Paths View Path Details 23 24 25 pe Pare records star end indices 1 4 Figure 16 3 Diverse Path Table In the Diverse Path Table window select Show Paths to view the diverse paths of a diversity group on the map along with the customizable Paths window showing detailed information for each segment of the path Select View Path Details to view the demand tunnel entries for this diverse group This is equivalent to opening the Network gt Elements gt Demands or Network gt Elements gt Tunnels window to the corresponding demand tunnel entry If you designed for standby or 1 1 paths the standby path will be displayed as an additional entry and STANDBY
81. Chapter 20 Advanced Traffic Generation for more information 30 Click the OK button to add the new entry The new record telnet will then appear in the list of service types on the right side of the Service Types window 31 Add another service type ftp and enter the fields Min BW 128K Max BW 2M BW IM and then click on the OK button to close the Add Service Type window 32 To modify any record select and highlight the record and click on the Modify button to open up the Modify Service Type window Change any value in this window and click OK 33 To delete any record select and highlight the record and click on the Delete button 34 To apply the new service types to new network demands open the Demands window by selecting Modify gt Elements gt Demands In the Demands window select Add gt One Demand or Add gt Multiple Demands In the Add Demand window select one of the service types you just created from the Service drop down box You will be asked if you wish to populate the fields with the fields of the service type demand template Click on the OK button to add a demand of that service type Note Applying service types to demands is also used in the Traffic Generation tool Please refer to Chapter 20 Advanced Traffic Generation for more details on that feature If you wish to use the service type only as a template and not as a demand field you can change the service type
82. Design from Scratch When designing from scratch all the existing paths are removed and path placement is performed from scratch NON INTERACTIVE MODE New in version 3 5 there is a menu Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Route From Scratch to directly access the option in non interactive sequential mode without going through the Console 11 To directly run tuning in non interactive sequential mode select Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Route From Scratch INTERACTIVE MODE 12 Select Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Interactive Mode to activate the Console window Click OK in the dialog box Then select option 2 from the Path Placement Menu in the Console window Option 2 results in the following display Redesign from Scratch Initial 110 demands 0 placed 110 unplaced 0 deactivated Placement Method 1 Sequential 2 Free run Select q QUIT All the existing paths are now removed and path placement can be performed from scratch The WANDL software can then do path placement according to the path placement method selected sequential or free run Type q and press lt Return gt to quit this option Note that in the example above after selecting this option none of the 110 demands are placed Thus quitting this option without performing path placement leaves all the circuits still unplaced From this point forward the program interface for the sequential and free run design modes
83. ER v Groups Discs Wi OC3 Show An None Filter Summary Nodes 5 14 Pseudo nodes 0 0 Groups 0 0 Links 18 18 LINK1E ATL LAX LINK18 OC3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3000 0 4628 0 9275 PN PE si 6 A Figure 6 15 Uncheck Show Option For All Nodes Except Those of Type Juniper 45 Next click Select gt All Points from the right click menu of the topology view window 46 Now if you re check the checkboxes for Foundry and Cisco you will see that those nodes are not highlighted as shown in Figure 6 16 8 ga Map Standard yj CISCO v FOUNDRY v JUNIPER v Groups Discs Show all None Filter Summary Nodes 14 14 Pseudo nodes O 0 Groups O 0 Links 18 18 APPAR SAAG d Figure 6 16 Highlighting Juniper Routers Only 6 12 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS 47 Now you can press down the mouse over one of the Juniper routers and drag the mouse to move those selected points 48 To save your graph coordinates only select File gt Save Network File gt Graph coordinates Or to save all network environment files including the graphcoord file you can choose Save in Spec Dir Save in Output Dir or Save As depending upon where you want to save to Undo and Redo of Moved Nodes In the case that you moved a node and afterwards decide that you did not want to move it the node can be moved back to the original location by using the Undo Move Node s but
84. Figure 10 3 C Modify 4 Nodes Properties Advanced Properties Design Properties IP UserParameters Delay Site ID Colocation Hierarchy Level Custom Rate Class Shortcut OK Cancel Help Figure 10 3 Modify Site for Selected Nodes 7 Click the OK button at the bottom of the window to submit the changes Click Yes to All in the confirmation dialog box to apply the change all the selected nodes You can verify that the change has been made by selecting a node and checking the Advanced Properties tab 8 Using the same procedure add another site named EAST for the eastern nodes and add a few of the eastern most nodes into this site 9 Click the Update button below the main menu bar to refresh the site list 10 Go to Modify gt Elements gt Sites or alternatively Network gt Elements gt Sites in View mode Select the site EAST and then the site WEST The nodes in the site are shown in the bottom table of the Sites window You can right click a site and select View Nodes to open a window with details on the nodes that are within that site In addition in Modify mode you can right click a site and select Create Group to create a topological group containing the nodes in a site You can then expand and collapse this group in the map window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 10 3 Creating Owners Owne
85. IC GENERATION The following section covers general traffic generation To generate traffic for VoIP or for a VPN please also refer to the Voice over IP and Virtual Private Networks chapter of the Router Guide 1 Traffic profiles are shown in the Traffic Generation window via Traffic gt Demand Generation gt General The window lists all the traffic profiles that have been created in the top table along with their individual properties in the bottom panel The buttons at the bottom are used to add modify and delete traffic profiles as well as to generate demand files based on selected traffic profiles Trafic Generation Amount Unit Traffic Type Service Type Profile i etup Options Demand Options Source Destination Setup Options O Full Duplex Pairs 2 All dd traffic between all source destination pairs 3 A F Add traffic only between pairs with identical source and destination O Aa Z Add traffic only between pairs with different source and destination Len nee Figure 20 1 Traffic Generation Window Displaying Traffic Profiles Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADVANCED TRAFFIC GENERATION Initially opening the Traffic Generation window will display an empty table since no traffic profiles have yet to be created To add a traffic profile click the Add button in the Traffic Generation window This will initiate the Traffic Generation Wizard which will guide the user
86. IGN Incremental Design In this section you will increase the traffic in the network model and perform an incremental design to see how the network design changes to accommodate the projected traffic growth 14 Switch the action mode to Modify mode by selecting the Modify button from the toolbar 15 Go to Modify gt Elements gt Demands Add gt Multiple Demands Add a 100K A gt Z demand between each ordered node pair F Add MultipleDemands Properties jserParameters Apply Template Default v BY Circuit ID Prefix INewCirc E Type Owner NONE Count 4 Pri Pre 2 Service Path Config Options Re routable Comment Placement A x Z Type Node v Filter Filter 2 Filter From Map Filter From Map a Remove a Remove Copy A gt Z Figure 14 5 Add Multiple Demands After clicking Add click Yes in the confirmation window and Close to continue and close the Add Multiple Demands window Note In addition to adding demands for the purpose of traffic forecasting studies you can also use Traffic gt Growth to multiply the bandwidth required by current demands by a percentage between 50 and 500 16 Switch back into Design action mode Click Yes to adjust path placement for all the demands 13 demands are not placed as shown in the following console message A
87. IL UNK14 34 60 NDFAL WDC Daily Sequence ILINK9 HOU DAL 0C3 155 520M 97 729M_ 223 267M 143 56 LINEFAIL LIN Link Peak Utilization LINK7 _ DET_ CHI 0C3 155 520M 90 070M 209 102M 134 INEFAIL 72 NDFAIL WDC_ Path Delay Informati NYC PHI OC3 155 520M 117 849M 206 889M 133 INEFAIL LINK 2 LINEFAIL LINK7 Tunnel Peak Utilizati LINK12 LAX SDG 0C3 155 520M 86 112M 205 009M 13182 LINEFAIL LINK18 INEFAIL LINK18 gt Up Down Sequence LINK10 SFO DEN 55 52 3 155 520M 36 402M 202 152M 129 98 INEFAIL LINK13 8 LINEFAIL LINK13 Filter b A BEBE 1 36 displayed 1 1 page D Exhaustive Site Faily f ILINK2 ATL WDC 0C3 155 520M 173 584M 246 069M 158 INEFAIL LINKE 80 NDFAI CHI 6 Figure 15 13 Link Peak Utilization Report 42 For each link this report records the worst utilization that was encountered across all single node and link failures For example in the above report the worst link utilization on LINK7 occurred during the failure of link Link14 SimType LINEFAIL amp SimEvent LINK14 with Link7 reaching a 162 14 Utilization PeakUtilPct as a result Under normal circumstances the utilization would be 101 079Mbps rather than 252 153Mbps 43 This report also records the peak number of demands that failed on each link across all single node and link failures For example the worst number of demands that failed on LI
88. ION 8 In this window you may enter a search criteria based on a wide range of parameters in the available tabs Select the Hardware drop down menu and specify the hardware type JUNIPER or an appropriate hardware type for your network and click OK The nodes that match this hardware type will be fetched and listed in the upper table of the Nodes window Close this window Note Available search preferences are exact match exact match as substring wildcards and regular expression syntax See Appendix B of the General Reference Guide for more details SIMPLE FILTER 9 You can follow the same procedure with the Filter button dah of the Links and Demands windows to fetch link and demand information respectively For link and demand queries you can use the gt and lt operators in your search For example for the link query in the Utilization tab where it says Util A gt Z you can select gt instead of All and then type 0 7 This query will return links whose utilization in the A to Z direction is greater than 70 Similarly for the demand query you can search for demands with bandwidth requirements greater than equal or less than a certain amount ADVANCED FILTER 10 For more powerful search features you can use the Advanced Filter window by selecting the Adv Filter button da Here you can query by entering in a query using and and or logical operations The Keys Relations and Curr
89. Instead of showing just the worst case utilization per link for across all single failures you may want to see a link s utilization for each failure To generate a link utilization report per failure use the text ascii mode This can be accessed either from an SSH telnet window to the server by executing the command u wandl bin bbdsgn spec file path 48 For example to generate a link utilization report per node failure from the BB DESIGN MAIN MENU select 8 Failure Simulation gt 3 Failure Analysis gt 3 Node Failure gt Enter the runcode gt Select Failure Report Options 49 The following menu will then be provided Report Generation Options 1 Create one path placement report per simulation No 2 Create one link utilization report per simulation No Select q Quit Help 50 Select 1 and 2 to create a report per simulation 51 Enter q to quit and start the simulations After the simulations are done quit out of all the menu by entering q successively until returning back to the main menu Enter q again and y to confirm 52 Then check the resulting directory and you should see one link utilization and path report per element failed 53 Another example is to create a separate link utilization report for each individual facility failure Run u wandl bin bbdsgn lt spec file path gt substituting lt spec file path gt with the path of your spec file Then select the following options 8 Failure Simu
90. Instructions 17 1 Detailed Procedures 17 1 Using the Route Optimization Wizard 17 1 18 Network Grooming 18 1 When to Use 18 1 Prerequisites 18 1 Related Documentation 18 1 Recommended Instructions 18 1 Detailed Procedures 18 2 Selecting Demands for Net Groom 18 2 Setting Options for Net Groom 18 2 Optimizing Demands 18 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Contents 7 19 Report Manager 19 1 When to use 19 1 Prerequisites 19 1 Related Documentation 19 1 Recommended Instructions 19 1 Detailed Procedures 19 2 Report Options 19 2 Navigating the Report Manager 19 3 Customizing the Report View 19 4 Saving Reports 19 5 20 Advanced Traffic Generation 20 1 Prerequisites 20 1 Related Documentation 20 1 Definitions 20 1 Recommended Instructions 20 2 Detailed Procedures 20 2 Traffic Generation 20 2 21 File Comparison Tools 21 1 When to use 21 1 Prerequisites 21 1 Related Documentation 21 1 Recommended Instructions 21 1 File Comparison 21 1 Revision Manager 21 1 Both Tools 21 2 Detailed Procedures 21 2 Opening the File Comparison tool 21 2 Opening and Using the Revision Manager tool 21 3 Both Tools 21 5 Comparing Two Arbitrary WANDL Files 21 8 linkconf Display Option 21 9 Command Line Utility wcompare sh 21 10 22 Text Mode 22 1 Contents 8 When to use 22 1 Prerequisites 22 1 Recommended Instructions 22 1 Detailed Procedures 22 1 Running bbdsgn 22 1 Navigation inthe menu 22 2 Rea
91. JUMIP ET NETWORKS WANDL Training Guide For NPAT and IP MPLSView Release Juniper Networks Inc 1194 North Mathilda Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 USA 408 745 2000 www juniper net Juniper Networks Junos Steel Belted Radius NetScreen and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc in the United States and other countries The Juniper Networks Logo the Junos logo and JunosE are trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc All other trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document Juniper Networks reserves the right to change modify transfer or otherwise revise this publication without notice WANDL Training Guide For NPAT and IP MPLSView Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc All rights reserved The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page YEAR 2000 NOTICE Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant Junos OS has no known time related limitations through the year 2038 However the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of or is intended for use with Juniper Networks software Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End
92. Link Labels Accept the All defaults to label all links with link names The link names are centered on each link Note that you can choose to only label selected links by selecting them first opening the label options and then choosing Only Current Selection under the Show Labels For section of the window In addition you can also customize the link labels to contain other attributes and combinations of attributes just as with nodes 20 When using label options that are dependent on Node A and Node Z attributes such as Interface Name the label name will be next to the associated Node For example if the map shows the position of NodeZ NodeA the Interface Name label will also be displayed as InterfaceZ InterfaceA 21 Commonly used label options are available under the What Text section The Customize option allows you to specify any key and the Output Format of the label 22 To toggle on off the pricing message on the upper right corner of the map use the Labels gt Show Message or Hide Message options from the popup menu BOTTOM BAR LABELS 23 It is also possible to customize the node and link labels that appear on the bottom bar of the topology map when the mouse is over a network element To do this navigate to the Labels gt Bottom Bar submenu from the right click pop up menu Select Nodes Customize from the submenu to get the window shown in Figure 6 9 You can add and remove what information you want to be displayed in
93. MULATION Now you can stop the trace by right clicking on the console and selecting the toggling Trace option once again to turn it off 11 From the trace file or from the console you will see summary statistics before and after the failure simulation These include the max hop count and average hop count for demands and information on failed demands including the count bandwidth of failed demands The final column indicates how many links were oversubscribed traffic exceeded link bandwidth before and after the failure simulation The summary section will look similar to the following SUMMARY Max Avg Info on Failed Demands LkBw Hop Hop Count Bandwidth BwRat HPr OvSub prev To 229 O 0 0 05 Q current To Bae 0 0 0 05 0 4 All demand s placed For this spec dog router network the report also indicates links that experienced a Reserved Bandwidth Violation during the simulation That is after the demands are rerouted certain links are over 100 utilized This flags potential congestion and dropping that may occur in the event of particular failures Note If you are running failure simulations in an ATM network you should not encounter this scenario If there is insufficient bandwidth the demand will fail to be rerouted and its status will be reported as FAILED 12 Click the Reset Simulation button to restore all devices taken down into operation Reset Simulation is used to reset the simulation to the initia
94. NK7 was 72 and this event occurs from the failure of node WDC Cnt_SimType NDFAIL amp Cnt SimEvent WDC Under normal circumstances the number of demands on this link would be 40 44 If the network contains a trafficload file with the demands for each of 24 periods there will be separate columns showing per period the link s peak utilization across all single failures that were performed these columns are titled PeakLoadBW_ 1 PeakLoadBW_2 etc and can be compared to the regular utilization when there is no failure LoadBW_ 1 LoadBW 2 etc The worst values of the 24 periods will be saved in WrstPeakLoadBW and WrstLoadBW The events triggering the peak utilization for each period will be indicated if the user checked the option to Include Simulation Events for all Periods in Peak Utilization Report 45 Note that this report provides data for the logical links in the network To obtain the physical port utilizations select the Peak Physical Link Utilization Report 46 As of 5 5 1 the format of this report has changed Traffic information for every link is now displayed in two rows instead of one The bandwidth and utilization information for one row are displayed for Anode rather than both the Anode and the Znode For backwards compatibility for scripting add the following parameter to the dparam file changedvsimformat 0 15 12 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc SIMULATION GENERATING ONE REPORT PER FAILURE 47
95. O NH MT MS M M MS MB M nt 2 1 1 22 N6 N23 N6 N23 MH6 RIVENDELL MULANIA 415 760K 600 400 200 Total of records 51 records stan end indices 1 51 Optimize Selected Demands Optimize All View Paths View Report Figure 18 5 Net Groom Window Before Optimization Optimizing Demands 13 The Net Groom window presents a table of selected demands as specified in the Net Groom Fetch Demands window Descriptions of each column in this table are provided in the table below Best AW The best possible admin weight for the demand if there were no other demands in the network The optimal admin weight for the demand taking into account the other demands in the network Best Path The best possible path of the demand if there were no other demands in the network New Path The optimal path for the demand taking into account the other demands in the network 14 You may select multiple demands from this list and optimize them by clicking the Optimize Selected Demands button or you can click the Optimize All button to optimize all demands in the table including those not shown on the current page 18 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc NETWORK GROOMING 15 After you have optimized the demands the New AW AW Gain and New Path columns will be populated The New AW and AW Gain values will always be less than or equal to the Best AW and Bes
96. PVCs traffic etc to the network using Modify gt Elements gt Demand That chapter also explained how to add multiple demands or a partial mesh of demands using the Add gt Multiple Demands feature The Traffic gt Growth feature is a quick way to adjust all existing demands by a certain percentage i n Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands you saw how to add end to end demands also called This chapter describes the advanced traffic generation feature in the WANDL software In this chapter the Traffic Generation tool also called Demand Generation allows the network operator to generate additional traffic demands by deriving it in three ways from the network model s existing traffic pattern from a user defined traffic type or from a user defined traffic profile This tool will create a new set of demands that are generated as specified by the user This module is an optional feature that requires a separate licensing key Please contact Juniper to find out the licensing information for this feature Prerequisites You should have a general understanding of the functionalities of this software The network should have service types and service profiles defined For a tutorial on adding service types and service profiles and assigning them to demands and nodes please refer to Chapter 10 Modifying Sites Owners Etc Related Documentation For more details about these windows refer to the General Reference Guide
97. Related Documentation 9 1 Recommended Instructions 9 1 Detailed Procedures 9 1 Modifying Nodes 9 2 Modifying Links 9 3 Modifying Demands 9 4 Setting the Type field and Configuring a Path 9 7 10 Modifying Sites Owners Etc 10 1 Contents 4 When to use 10 1 Prerequisites 10 1 Related Documentation 10 1 Recommended Instructions 10 1 Detailed Procedures 10 1 Creating a Site 10 2 Creating Owners 10 4 Admin Weight Metric Rules 10 6 Specifying Link Characteristics 10 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Specifying a Formula Using Fixed and Variable Weight 10 6 Setting Multiple Formulas 10 6 Service Type 10 8 Service Profile 10 9 11 User Parameters and Link Rules 11 1 When to use 11 1 Prerequisites 11 1 Related Documentation 11 1 Outline 11 1 User Parameters 11 1 Viewing User Parameters 11 2 Adding Modifying User Parameters 11 3 Modifying User Parameter Values 11 3 Performing Text Filter on User Parameters 11 4 Map Labels with User Parameters 11 4 usrparam format 11 5 Attribute Declarations 11 5 Attribute Value Pairs for Nodes and Links 11 5 Attribute Value Pairs for Tunnels 11 5 Link Rules 11 6 Viewing Link Rules 11 6 Adding Modifying Link Rules 11 7 Viewing Link Rules Integrity Check Report 11 10 linkrules format 11 10 12 Modifying Link Pricing 12 1 When to use 12 1 Prerequisites 12 1 Related Documentation 12 1 Recommended Instructions 12 1 Detailed Procedures 12 1 ICustom Rates 12 1 The user
98. Start Date Date for the beginning of the depreciation period when the link is owned e List Price Similar to card cost table e Discount Similar to card cost table e Depreciation period Similar to card cost table e Maintenance Similar to card cost table There are several options to input the link costs These can be defined as follows 1 At the site level from siteA to siteZ no need to input router name and interface name 2 At the router level from nodeA to nodeZ Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc NETWORK COST ALLOCATION 3 At the interface level from nodeA interfaceA to nodeZ interfaceZ 4 For cables local within the same site Examples Local links with ET10G This will be applied for all links of ET10G in the same site Local r r ET10G Site to Site costing This will be applied for all links of ET10G from siteA to siteZ SLUGAy 7 p61 Let 77 Hl LOGy lt SITE COST TABLE The following table is a sample site cost table in CSV format SiteID CostItem Start Date DD MM YYYY List Price Discount Depreciation Period Overhead SLP ORD Aa y Cono re loning 17 1 2006 1600000 50 80 50 ORD Building Insurance 1 1 2006 2000 100 ORD Property Taxes 1 1 2006 10000 100 Column header descriptions e Site Site name comes from the site file Routers must have been grouped within a Site or a Point Of Presence prior to saving the network on the web e Cost item 5 pre defined i
99. TL NODE BOS NODE CHI NODE Filename bblink x LINK1 ATL BOS DEF 1 OC3 DIST 100 LINK2 BOS CHI DEF 1 OC3 DIST 100 LINK3 CHI ATL DEF 1 OC3 DIST 100 Filename demand x DMD1 ATL BOS 730017 R A2Z 02 02 ATL BOS For help on the file formats or the keywords required in the spec file please refer to the File Format Guide Note Some users find it easier and faster to edit the text files directly especially in creating the initial network Others may find it easier to use the friendly graphical interface and have the network files and spec file automatically generated by the program For more on how to create a new network project via the graphical interface please refer to Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 2 3 nO Adding Comments Additional Notes 2 4 Note that you can add comments to your network files by using the pound sign These lines will be ignored For example comments can be used to list the headings for the data columns in the muxloc node file ID NAME NPA NXX Note however that if the program overwrites updates your existing network files via File gt Save Network not all comments will be preserved To preserve comments when the network files are overwritten use a pound sign followed by an exclamation mark e g Note however that this only preserves those comments that are at the end of a valid entry For example suppose comment
100. TORY Step 1 Configure source and destination Load an input file for source destination and weights Ifyou have an inputtile specifying traffic source and destination locations specify the file name and file type below then click Next Ifyou do notwish to specify an inputtile click Mes Select Source Destination Input File lt no input file selected Browse Choose Input File Type s S 5 a Mo File is C C C PRP E P A Figure 20 3 Traffic Generation Wizard Import File 4 The next step allows the user to select source locations and weights Nodes and groups can be selected from the left panel and copied over to the right panel The weights of the nodes or groups in the right panel can be modified to be any decimal number E Traffic Generation Wizard Step 1 Configure source and destination Specitwverity source locations and weights Type Mode Search D C e Cere E Figure 20 4 Traffic Generation Wizard Select Source Locations 5 The next step allows the user to select destination locations and weights much like selecting source locations and weights in the previous step To copy the source location list to the destination location list the user can click the User Source Locations button 20 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADVANCED TRAFFIC GENERATION E Traffic Generation Wizard Step 1 Configure source and destination Specitwverity destination locati
101. The show hardware information must be imported in order to have a precise inventory view of each router In addition the folder called hw inventory out must exist and the equipment files parsed from Tools gt Hardware Inventory 3 Save the spec file from File gt Save Network and then to the web from File gt Export to Web Related Documentation You may also want to refer to the General Reference Guide s chapter on the Hardware Model Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 13 1 ae Getting Started The Network Cost Allocation feature is available from the Web gt Reports gt Network Reports Select the spec path this is the network input file specification folder Then click Network Costing Reports Network View Configuration Management Fault Management Performance Management Admin Reports Web Client KS Main Menu gt Network Reports gt export home wandl tmp spec IE Generated Network Data cael T Jexr art home war jl t p Spe Available Web Reports and Topology Maps Network Costing Reports Generated Date Available Web Reports fa october 21 2010 15 53 25 Network Configuration Inventory E October 21 2010 15 39 06 Network Configuration Inventory Delete Dates Show the URL Figure 13 1 Web Network Cost Report Network Cost Inputs The table costs for the various network elements can be uploaded or modified only if the user has logged in as the admin user By d
102. USING THE LINKDIST FILE Admin weight also known as distance or administrative cost but not to be confused with geographical distance or monetary cost is a user defined weight that can be used to influence routing This metric is used with the Adm Weight routing method which aims at routing a demand in a way that minimizes the sum of the admin weights of the links on the path 52 The linkdist file allows the user to specify desired admin weights for links between certain node pairs Its format is as follows f rom to dist NO1 N02 5 NO1 NO3 1 If the hopdist design parameter in the dparam file is set to Adm Weight then the distances in this file are used to calculate the lengths of the demand paths during path placement The linkdist file is used where a distance symmetric or asymmetric is not already specified in the miscellaneous field of the bblink file DIST x DISTA2Z x DISTZ2A x where x is replaced by a number Where a distance is not specified in either the bblink file or the linkdist file the distance value defaults to that specified in the global parameter linkdistunit defined in the dparam file Specifying linkdistunit x where x is positive specifies the default distance of x Specifying linkdistunit x where x is positive specifies that the program is to calculate distances based on airline mileage x rounded up to the nearest integer For example if Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 17 DESIGN 14 14 18
103. User Parameters Window Click on the different tabs to see the defined User Parameters for each network object User Parameters can be created for Nodes Links Sites Demands and Tunnels You can also view the defined User Parameters for each network object by viewing the User Parameters tab for that object s window Select Network gt Elements gt Nodes and click the User Parameters tab The User Parameters will be displayed as shown in Figure 11 2 Fete tete Network Nodes ID Mame pus Lata Count F 1l ATL ATLANTA 436 a m LIS ez BOSTON eer em e f CHI_ICHICAGO Summary i Modes CR ER User Parameters Highlight Highlight All Figure 11 2 Nodes Window User Parameters Tab 4 Similarly this can also be done for the Links Sites Demands and Tunnels windows Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USER PARAMETERS AND LINK RULES Adding Modifying User Parameters 5 Switch to Modify mode and select Modify gt Elements gt User Parameters The User Parameters window will appear as shown in Figure 11 3 parameter parameter Figure 11 3 User Parameters Window 6 In the User Parameters window click on the Add button The Add User Parameters window will be displayed as shown in Figure 11 4 Add User Parameter for Node x ne Enter the parameter D Po oK Cancel Figure 11 4 Add User Parameters 7 Specify name of the User Parameter e g Buildi
104. Window To preserve your changes to the Map be sure to save the network environment via File gt Save Network before closing the network You can also save just the graph coordinates file using File gt Save Network File gt Graph Coordinates Accessing Recently Opened Project Files 11 Now select the File menu as shown in Figure 3 5 A list of the most recently opened spec files will be displayed towards the bottom of this menu This is a shortcut for accessing recently used networks File Application Tools WNetinfo Design simulation Mew Metwork Open File Manager Open Live Network Import Data Close Read Save Network Save Single File Save Web Data Lock Lert LAURE dele 2 fuswandlisamplefrouteradvancedtishispec mpls fish a fuAvandlisampletranspontimeshispec mesh 4 fusAwandlsamplefrautendogispec dog S fuswandl samplefrautentishispec mpls fish Figure 3 5 Recently Opened Spec List 12 From this list select the spec file you want to re open You will be prompted to select an Output Path Recall that this is the directory to which reports and trace files will automatically be saved It will default to the spec directory the same directory in which the spec file is located 3 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc CREATING amp EDITING A NETWORK MODEL n his chapter you will learn how to create a new paper network model via the WANDL client You may create a new network model from scratch
105. al Sort Here you can sort either by Best AW Gain or AW Gain 17 You can view the Orig Best and New paths in the Map window by clicking the View Paths button This will bring up the Map window along with a Paths window from which you can select which path Orig Best or New to view in the Map window i Show Path Zoom to Path Link name Path H1 to N23 Into node Figure 18 7 View Paths Window 18 You can also view a report of the optimized demands and paths by clicking on the View Report button Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 18 5 NETWORK GROOMING Report Viewer space wandl A mplsv samples Atlantis NETGROOMRPT zz3 Explanation 3 Print PathName From Mode To Mode Bandwidth Orig Hops a Hons Orig Au ckt00266 aa T _ AE 190K ee 00084 wa IN25 asom so w A a a O a oos mia wa hosok e a ooms miz was hasek 5 4 w o 00024 mio was 22380 e a Bo coo203 ws was 508200 e w Goo ooa Na O Naa eaa eo ckt00013 1081 So canari wma a 1 Filter ili Est Search 1 31 displayed 1 1 page i gt ww Go to page Go Lines Per Page 200 Set Figure 18 8 Net Groom Report Viewer 19 To view the Net Groom options used in this session and other useful information you can click on the Explanation button 20 To print this report click on the Print button 18 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc REPORT MANAGER When to use
106. ame differences td Save Files of type An Files x Cancel Figure 21 11 Save Window on Client Machine 9 After a file name is entered and the user clicks Save the user may select the format of the text file as shown in Figure 21 12 If the user selects Yes only the entries that were added or modified will be saved to this file If the user selects No the removed lines will be shown in addition to the added and modified lines Do you want to save only addedichanged temis onh Yes Ho include removed temis Figure 21 12 Save the Added Modified lines only windw 10 Go back to the left panel and click on the filename called demand Aggregated These files are the aggregated versions of the original demand file What this means is that for any demands that are repeated in the demand file those demands would only show up once in the aggregated demand file with a count field called Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 21 7 Be of circuit and total bandwidth summed up in the field Total BW In the figure shown in Figure 21 13 instead of listing the demand from A 3 2 to A 3 3 twice it is listed once and the of circuit column specifies the number 2 and the Total BW column specifies 20000000 WANDL File Comparison NPAT WANDL file comparison File Types bblink demand demand Aggregated dparam hpnni linkconf muxloc nodeparam 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000000 20000
107. and amy Later Bob may decide that he wants to use his own link file in his own directory In that case he can change the bblink file path as follows Filename u wandl bob spec bob runcode bob3 datadir u wandl amy muxloc muxloc amy bblink u wandl bob bblink divdesign changed bblink file demand demand amy Making a Copy of a Spec File The easiest way to make a copy of a set of network files is to open the spec file double click the spec file in the File Manager and then save it using a different runcode and or a different directory from File gt Save Network Alternatively you may make a copy of all the input files and the spec file to another directory Then open up the spec file to change the datadir and file references as necessary Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 2 5 ne 2 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc OPENING AND CLOSING A NETWORK PROJECT his chapter describes how to open an existing network project file in the WANDL client As described in Chapter 2 What is a Spec File each spec file or specification file represents a different network project and contains references to all the individual network files that comprise the network project When to use Use these procedures to open a network project file that has been previously created Prerequisites You should already have a basic understanding of spec files as described in Chapter 2 What is a Spec File If you ha
108. and select View gt Links under Pointer from the right click menu to get a Links window Much like the display of node information the information for each link is separated into tabs where each tab presents different properties regarding the selected link You can then view the link properties for that link by clicking on the different tabs in the lower half of the window Similarly you can view information for only selected links by lt Ctrl gt clicking the links and then right clicking one of them and selected View gt Selected Links To learn more about the fields in these windows refer to the General Reference Guide Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 7 5 VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION Saving Node Link and Demand Information to a Report 22 To save the data that you see in the currently open Network Info window click on the Save button il at the lower left area of the window The columns that will be saved can be customized by right clicking on the column head and select Table Options as described in step 5 on page 7 3 The following window is an example window after selecting the Save button in the Links view allowing you to specify where to save the file and the file format as shown in Figure 7 5 Report Options x ee Report To 7 Server CJSTOMREPORT mpls fsh csw Browse a D Client FO Report Format O Formated Text cov Ci HTML Figure 7 5 Report Options e Amon
109. angements use the right click menu s Layout gt Set Lat Lon from Map option The graphical coordinates will not be saved until you save all network files or save the graphical coordinates to a file using File gt Save Network File gt Graphical Coordinates This information can later be read back in using the File gt Read option Network Files tab as described in Chapter 5 Loading a Network File For more details on the file format for the graphcoord file refer to the File Format Guide The geographical coordinates on the other hand are saved in the muxloc file when you save all network files They can be modified using the Modify gt Elements gt Nodes menu or they can be set according to the map position using the Layout gt Set Lat Lon from Map option described above For instructions on how to modify nodes refer Chapter 9 Modifying Nodes Links and Demands For more details on the file format of the muxloc file refer to the File Format Guide NODE SELECTION 36 To select a single node click on it If you have exactly one node selected the links coming out of it will be highlighted in a special color default blue and the connected nodes will be labeled 37 To select several nodes lt Ctrl gt click or lt Shift gt click on each additional node Note that clicking a node without pressing the lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift gt keys will cause a fresh selection of nodes Sometimes an easier way to select multiple nodes is to drag a box on th
110. ant and then click Show Path If a path is found it is displayed on the topology map and a Paths window will appear showing the hop by hop path from node A to node B The console also provides information concerning capacity route cost and maximum path bandwidth Alternatively you can click on the P icon P Jon the map toolbar rightmost pane and then click on two nodes Or right click on the Network Elements gt Nodes list of the topology map select Paths click in list from the right click menu and select the first endpoint from the list and lt Ctrl gt click the second endpoint from the list z Mame IF From ModeFrom io Type IF To ModeTo lo Tunnel 0 0 0 0 IDET OCS 0 0 0 0 BOS 0 0 0 0 Bas OOS 0 0 0 0 DET RBOSWOC 0 0 0 0 DET OCS 0 0 0 0 CHI IREOSYWDC 0 0 0 0 CHI OCS 0 0 0 0 WDC RBEOSWDC 0 0 0 0 WDC oca 0 0 0 0 ATL Al 4 CO Hide Unrelated Nodes Figure 7 10 Paths window 34 The Paths window can be customized to show additional columns by right clicking on the column header and selecting Table Options and moving the desired columns into the right pane 35 The results will give you information about where that demand would be placed Additional information displayed in the console includes the Route Cost a sum of the administrative weights of the path that is chosen and the Max Path Bw or the maximum demand bandwidth that could be successfully placed on the Copyri
111. any link failure The Diversity Design options allow you to specify which demands are critical and which are essential This is determined using both the Set Critical Essential Demand Priority values and the priority or preempt priority checkboxes Every demand has a priority and preempt priority field that the user can set in Modify mode see the Modify Demand window Pri Pre field These values influence the routing order and bumping of demands During a diversity design these values can be used to influence the design ensuring that enough bandwidth is available to route the high priority demands Note For certain hardware models WANDL s preempt priority actually maps to holding priority Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN The following example illustrates how demands are classified as critical or essential Suppose a particular network has very important demands that are marked as priority 10 Additionally it may have other less important demands that are marked as priority 12 Assume that for this particular network hardware a lower number indicates a higher priority In the Diversity Design Use section of the diversity design options the user selects the priority checkbox indicating that each demand s priority value as opposed to preempt priority value will be used to determine whether the demand is classified as critical or essential Now suppose the user sets the critical demand priority to 10 and the
112. aps City Labels Internet Map at Click gt Bottom Bar Line Widths gt Hide Message Find Nodes 14 14 Export Pseudo nodes 0 0 i Groups 0 0 Print Links 18 18 MLV vo vHADItHO Figure 6 7 Right Click Menu Labels Option 18 Select Node Labels from the Labels submenu Select All for Show Labels For and ID for What Text and click OK Your network model will be labelled as follows Types 18 links cost 2817570 3 BROCADE cisco JUNIPER A Groups Discs 003 Show Ai None R N N RN R Filter Summary Nodes 14 14 Pseudo nodes 0 0 Groups 0 0 Links 18 18 fa a g s D Cl P p 13 P E Figure 6 8 Node Labels turned on for all Nodes 6 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Note that you can also choose to only label selected nodes To do so first select the nodes you want to label as in Node and Link Selection and Node Rearrangement on page 6 11 and then right click and choose the Node Labels option from the right click menu Finally select Only Current Selection under the Show Labels For section of the window In addition to learn more about customizing the node labels to contain other attributes and combinations of attributes refer to the Reference Guide chapter on Topology LINK LABELS 19 To turn on link labels right click on the network model area of the topology window and select Labels gt Link Labels gt
113. arlier for the demands indicates payload only and does not include overhead To view the actual bandwidth including the overhead click on one of the 750K demand entries and press the BW Ovhd button You will see that the total bandwidth is roughly 828K Bandwidth Allocation CL CULCLD From To Bandwidth TYPE CELL Trunk Frame Trunk MyDmd 2 N1 N3 150K NRT 6828 496K 828 496K Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 8 9 How was 828K derived ATM cells are 53 bytes 424 bits each carrying 48 bytes payload and 5 bytes overhead A payload of 750K needs to be transported using 750000 48 8 1954 cells 1954 cells 424 bits cell 828 496K 41 In the resulting Demands window move the Current Route column to the left To do so scroll to the right until you see the Current Route column in the table Press down the left mouse button when the pointer is over the heading of the Current Route column Drag the pointer left as far as you can toward the left end of the table Move the scrollbar left If you want you can use the same method to drag the Current Route column further toward the left You can also resize a column by putting the pointer over the divider until you see the double arrow pressing your left mouse button and then dragging to the desired width 42 Click on Close to close the Demands window 43 Finally to save your changes in View or Design mode select File gt Save Network A default directory will be provided whi
114. artial list of existing utilities that can be used to convert your files to WANDL file format Please contact Juniper if the extraction utility you are looking for is not listed here or if you would like to request customized extraction utilities EXTRACTION TOOLS FOR TOPOLOGY AND PROVISIONED DATA Alcatel ATM al2wandl WANDL WAND EXTRACTION TOOLS FOR TRAFFIC DATA getiptraf conviptraf WANDL Lucent ATM bulk2obj obj2wandl WANDL 1 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS his chapter explains the document conventions used in the WANDL documentation set delivered with and as part of the WANDL software product Document Conventions e Keyboard keys are represented by bold sans serif font appearing in brackets for example lt Enter gt e Window titles field names menu name menu options and Graphical User Interface buttons are represented in a bold sans serif font e Command line text is indicated by the use of a constant width type Keyboard Window and Mouse Terminology and Functionality The WANDL documents are written using a specific sort of vocabulary Descriptions of the more important parts of this vocabulary follow Note In the user documentation mouse button means left mouse button unless otherwise stated e Window Any framed screen that appears on the interface e Cursor The symbol marking the mouse position that appears on the workstation interface The cursor symbol chan
115. ath specifications generated by the WANDL software The hardware then places the circuits according to the user s specification Dynamic rerouting of circuits occurs only when the hardware fails With the path select feature users have better control over the performance of the hardware Customer experience has shown that a network is more reliable when the path select feature is used to route all the circuit paths according to the path design When to use Use the path placement procedures to optimize your network demand paths design diverse paths or to perform what if studies to see how demands are routed Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you must have created a spec file as described in Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model or opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You should then continue with these procedures to perform path placement Related Documentation For an overview of the WANDL software or for a detailed description of each feature and the use of each WANDL client window refer to the General Reference Guide To perform network grooming refer to Chapter 18 Network Grooming Note that there is also an option to simulate path placement in the simulation mode Simulation gt Simulate Path Placement That can be used to run multiple path placement iterations to gain statistical summary information but it does not result in any modifications to your network For more de
116. ation Click on OK to continue 2 x Letter z Source Automatically Select Orientation Margins inches Portrait Left fi Right fi Landscape Top fi Bottom fi Cancel Printer Figure 6 31 Which Part and Page Setup Window for Microsoft Windows 95 The Print window shown in Figure 6 32 is then displayed By default the topology can be printed to a PostScript file and or to a PostScript printer in either color or grey scale using the default print command For Unix operating systems if your print command is different from the default command lp specify it in the Print Command Options and then click on the Print button Click on the Print button for Solaris or the OK button for PC to queue the print job Click on the Cancel button to cancel printing Print Printer Name HP Laserlet 4050 N PS Properties Copies it k Status Ready Print to Type HP Laserlet 4050 Series PS Where LPT 1 Printer PO Comment Print to file _ File leut ps Print range Banner Page Title a Pages from i to 3555 Print Command Options Bi Copies Humber of copies i Ei pi pi Collate Print Cancel T ae Figure 6 32 Topology Print Window for Solaris Microsoft Windows Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 23 i 6 24 EXPORT 96 The Export option previously Save As is used to sa
117. available from Network gt Elements gt Links in Viewor Design mode and examine the Capacity tab Avail column You can also bring up the link window from the map by right clicking on a link and selecting View gt Links under Pointer From examining the available capacity on both the A gt Z and Z gt A directions of the link you can see that there is insufficient capacity to route the three unplaced demands Switch back to Modify mode and open the Modify gt Elements gt Demands window Filter to get the unplaced demands again and click Delete and then select All Entries to delete all three unplaced demands Click Yes in the dialog window to confirm the deletion After clicking Modify gt Update Network State we can see from the Console window that there are no longer any unplaced demands Switch to View or Design action mode and select File gt Save Network to save the design environment Enter a new runcode and then press Select If the spec file s directory is read only you can select a different directory Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS Setting the Type field and Configuring a Path This section of the tutorial will not reference a specific example Note that this does not apply for routers However for routers if you have a license to use the tunnel features you can configure a tunnel route and backup tunnel in similar manner 26 Perform a Mo
118. b Find product documentation http www juniper net techpubs Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base http kb juniper net Download the latest versions of software and review release notes http www juniper net customers csc software Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications http kb juniper net InfoCenter Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum http www juniper net company communities Open a case online in the CSC Case Management tool http www juniper net cm To verify service entitlement by product serial number use our Serial Number Entitlement SNE Tool https tools juniper net SerialNumberEntitlementSearch You can open acase with JTAC on the Web or by telephone Use the Case Management tool in the CSC at http www juniper net cm Call 1 888 314 JTAC 1 888 314 5822 toll free in the USA Canada and Mexico For international or direct dial options in countries without toll free numbers see http www juniper net support requesting support html Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Table of Contents Introduction l 1 Following Along with the Examples in this Manual Key Software Features 3 Add On Features I 4 Supported Hardware I 5 Alcatel 1 5 Cisco Systems I 5 ECI Telecom LTD I 5 Forcel0 I 5 Foundry I 5 Huawei I 5 IBM I 5 Juniper Networks I 5 Lucent Technologies Ascend Communications I 5 Marconi
119. between the source and destination pairs configured for the current traffic profile Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADVANCED TRAFFIC GENERATION E Traffic Generation Wizard Step 2 Configure demands Configure the total amount of traffic Input the total amount of traffic to be generated for this traffic profile Total Generated Traffic Total Amount 2006 Bw hits O number of demands C percent of current EVY percent of current number of demands Properties of individual demands willbe configured in the next panel sak JL net ance E Figure 20 8 Traffic Generation Wizard Specify Total Bandwidth 9 The next step allows the user to configure individual demand properties If Service Type is selected the generated demands will each have properties of the selected service type and similarly for Service Profile If Custom Configuration is selected each demand will be equal or less than the size specified in the Max Demand BW field and will be assigned the type specified in the Type field E Traffic Generation Wizard Step 2 Configure demands Configure individual demand properties Configure properties of individual demands using one ofthe following options Service Type Demands willbe generated to fitthis service profile Custom Configuration hax Demand Bry 10M Type All generated demands will have these properties seas JL ne
120. ble groups of links are treated as identical and therefore are also drawn in BLUE for option 1 In option 4 Rearrange however these are drawn in white When answering n to the Perform vendor and site adjustment prompt it is possible that an added link will be drawn on top of a deleted link hiding the deleted link s color To see that a link was deleted in the same place that a link was added select option 2 Note You may want to change your background color in case it is the same as one of these colors Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 9 DESIGN 14 Diversity Design 14 10 A diversity design or resiliency design is more sophisticated than the basic design because the program will create a low cost design that also satisfies user specified resiliency requirements This is especially important for networks in which redundancy is critical and certain failures are not acceptable The design that is produced can ensure that all traffic demands in the network can be rerouted in the event of any single node link site or facility failure depending on what you specify 22 Click on Tools gt Options gt Design to open up the Design options window Then click on the Diversity option underneath Design to see the window shown in Figure 14 7 IPJMPLS View Options General Backbone Design Diversity Resize Config Editor Colors Fonts DemandTunnel Sizing Path Placement Advanced BGP Backbone Des
121. bundle are not used by the routing processes This is the reason why the aggregated links must have their costs initialized in the Link Cost table The network cost allocation supports two types of links 1 Leased links In this case only the Monthly rental has to be populated 2 Owned links Similarly to the equipment cost table the depreciation period list price discount etc fields have to be populated The following table is a sample link cost table in CSV format NodeA Site ID NodeA ID InterfaceA NodeZ Site ID NodeZ ID InterfaceZ Type Cir cuit ID Monthly Rental Start Date List Price Discount Depreciation period Maintenance ORD ORD NPR22 xe 4 0 0 0 MID MID PRG77 xe 3 070 0 ET106G 10000 L717 2010 100000 50 60 10 ORD ORD NPR22 xe 4 1 0 0 MID MID PRG77 xe 3717 0 0 ET10G 12000 17172010 120000 50760 10 ORD ORD NPR22 xe 173 0 0 SPR SPR PRAS3 xe 373 70 07EBT10G 20000 47 1 2010 150000 50 60 10 Column header descriptions e NodeA Site_ID Site of the router A e NodeA ID Hostname of the router A e InterfaceA Interface name of the router A not interface SNMP index e NodeZ Site_ID Site of the router Z e NodeZ ID Hostname of the router Z e InterfaceZ Interface name of the router Z not interface SNMP index e Type Type of the link per WANDL terminology This is a mandatory field e Circuit ID Reserved field e Monthly Rental The monthly cost of the link when it is leased e
122. by pressing on the New button in the Bands for this Type panel and enter a higher distance for each new band The last distance value should be 9999 or higher Tip To type in a cell double click to get the cursor to display To replace a complete word in a cell triple click on a cell Note If the corresponding distance band does not automatically display select an entry of the service type to display it 12 You can add additional rows by clicking on the Add Row button on the right side of the window 13 When you are finished click OK Then click Close in the Custom Rates window The price displayed on the map should be automatically updated if links were found with the appropriate link service type Note If the price remains 0 there are two possible reasons why It is possible that there are no links falling under the user specified link service types Alternatively the length of certain links airline mileage between source and destination node may be unknown The geographical location of the link s end nodes should be specified In the US it is sufficient to specify the npa nxx Otherwise one can specify the latitude and longitude to allow the program to solve for the geographical airline distance This can be done through the Modify gt Elements gt Nodes option 12 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING LINK PRICING The usercost and bblink files Link cost can also be specified at a country to
123. can also create a custom diversity group by modifying a set of demands and specifying a name for the diversity group in the Demand Type Parameter Generation window s Diversity field after clicking the Type button equivalent to typing in Ddivgroupname in the demand type field where divgroupname is the name of the diverse group In that case you are specifying that all of those demands should be designed with disjoint paths if possible 21 Once you have created diverse groups in your network select Design gt TE Tunnels gt Path Design or Design gt Demands gt Path Design for non router networks to open the following window shown in Figure 16 2 _ Diverse Path Design Diverse Group Level Diverse Path Type O Facility C Link Site O Standby Secondary Path Contig Options r Remove configured paths before tuning Mark new paths as configured Current Link Reservation Parameters fat O00 amp fixedfat Obits Use Options menu Design Reserved Bandwidth tab to change values View Tune Paths Auto Design Close Help Figure 16 2 Diverse Path Design Options Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 16 9 ne 16 10 Specify the level of diversity you wish to create For tunnels router only also specify the type of path you want to create for the demand standby or secondary Allow the program to remove configured paths so that new paths can be created to be diverse Then click
124. ced Properties tab select US and click OK Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING LINK PRICING Modify 1 Node Properties Advanced Properties Design Properties BGP IP Delay Site ID NONE Colocation NONE Hierarchy Level REGULAR Custom Rate Class NONE on camel Hen Figure 12 3 Specifying Custom Rate Class for Nodes 7 Inthe Modify Custom Rate Class window click on the Add button again and enter a second class name e g Intl Repeat the last step to specify nodes with the Intl class 8 Select Modify gt More gt Custom Rates gt Add Modify to open the following window Classi Classe Install Fee Monthly Fixed Cost Monthly Inc Cost 6200 0 Figure 12 4 Modify Custom Rates 9 Select the Add button to add a new custom rate entry An Add Custom Rate window will open as shown in Figure 12 5 In the Link Type field of this window select a trunk type in your network e g ET100M by either clicking on the pull down selection menu or typing it in manually Next select the class US for both Class1 and Class2 This means that this custom rate will be applied to links of the specified trunk type with one end node in Class1 and one endnode in Class2 The class ALL refers to the set of all nodes Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 12 3 Ne Add Custom Rate vendor DEF Classi us v Link Type
125. ch can be changed by typing in a directory after Look In and pressing lt Enter gt or lt Return gt A new directory can also be selected by clicking the Create New Directory Icon providing a directory name and then double clicking the newly created subdirectory from the list 44 Choose a runcode If you click the Save button or press lt Enter gt the default runcode will be selected Otherwise enter a runcode and press lt Enter gt For example type triangle3 and press lt Enter gt If the runcode already exists in the directory of choice you will be asked to confirm the runcode 45 After you have saved the network files you can view them using the File Manager by first refreshing your view click Refresh and then traversing to the directory you saved in To view the spec as a text file right click on the file name and select Edit To view all other files double click the file The Appendix below of the files created is provided for your convenience or for comparison with your own Appendix A Sample Files 8 10 SPEC TRIANGLE3 datadir runcode triangle3 ratedir u wandl db rates default muxloc muxloc triangle3 mux location file nodeparam nodeparam triangle3 mux type and constraints file bblink bblink triangle3 backbone link file graphcoord graphcoord triangle3 defines graphics coordinates of nodes graphcoordaux graphcoordaux triangle3 aux graphics coordinates of nod
126. cost and bblink files 12 5 Order of Precedence 12 5 The usercost File 12 5 13 Network Cost Allocation 13 1 Prerequisites 13 1 Related Documentation 13 1 Getting Started 13 2 Network Cost Inputs 13 2 Equipment Cost Tables 13 2 Chassis cost table 13 2 Card Cost Table 13 3 Link Cost Table 13 4 Site Cost Table 13 5 How to Upload the Cost Tables 13 6 Deliveries and Reporting 13 6 Cost Reports 13 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Contents 5 Flow Cost Report 13 6 14 Design 14 1 Background and Definitions 14 1 When to use 14 1 Prerequisites 14 1 Prerequisites for Backbone Design 14 1 Related Documentation 14 2 Definitions 14 2 Recommended Instructions 14 2 Detailed Procedures 14 2 Backbone Type Specification 14 4 Node Weight Specification 14 4 Green field Design 14 5 Incremental Design 14 7 Compare Link Files 14 8 Diversity Design 14 10 Link Failure and Site Diversity Definitions 14 10 Critical and Essential demands 14 10 Resize 14 13 Influencing the Design 14 15 Using the fixlink File 14 15 Using the usercost File 14 15 Using the rsvbwfile File 14 16 Using the nodeweight File 14 16 Using the linkdist File 14 17 Modeling Node Cost 14 18 Facility Aware Design 14 18 Other Control Factors 14 18 Create Simplified Group Model 14 20 15 Simulation 15 1 Contents 6 Backbone Simulation 15 1 When to use 15 1 Prerequisites 15 2 Related Documentation 15 2 Recommended Instructions 15 2 Detailed Proced
127. country level using the usercountrycost file or node to node level using the usercost file or on a link level using the bblink file ORDER OF PRECEDENCE The order of precedence in case of conflict is as follows bblink gt usercost gt custom rates In other words any pricing info specified in the bblink file overrides conflicting information in the usercost or custrate files Any pricing info in the usercost file overrides conflicting information in the custrate files 14 In the bblink file s comma separated miscellaneous field optional you can specify COST n currency_unit substituting n with a number and the optional currency_unit with the two letter currency e g DL for US dollar BP for British pound A sample bblink entry is shown below Field Separator space or tab LinkName NodeA NodeZ Vendor BwType Misc N2 N6 ATT 3 LS COST 1500 00DL The bblink file can be read in using the File gt Load Network Files feature explained in Chapter 5 Loading a Network File 15 The usercost file should be specified before opening the spec file and referenced in the spec file as usercost filename substituting filename with the respective filename to be read in upon loading a spec file THE USERCOST FILE The usercost file is used to define the cost for links according to the end nodes vendor and trunk type During a design if this file is specified a link created between two end nodes with the specified trunk
128. create a spec file for your model network using the WANDL client Alternatively to create a spec file using the text mode refer to Chapter 22 Text Mode If network files in WANDL format have already been created their locations can be specified in the spec file during spec file creation Otherwise they can be specified afterwards either by editing the spec file through text mode or WANDL client or by saving the design environment through the WANDL client after making changes in Modify mode as explained in Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands Note Please check with the WANDL hardware specific documents for information on extraction utilities that can convert your data into WANDL s file format You should have logged onto the WANDL software s graphical user interface It may be helpful if you first read Chapter 2 What is a Spec File A basic understanding of the Unix file system will also be helpful Recommended Instructions Following 1s a high level sequential outline of the spec file creation process and the associated recommended procedures 1 Create a new directory for a spec file as described in Creating a Directory for Your Network on page 4 2 2 Create a spec file in that directory as described in Create a Spec File on page 4 3 3 Edit a spec file after it is created as described in Editing a Spec File on page 4 6 4 Create a network file using the text editor templates and edit the spec file accordingl
129. d all links in the network will be used to route demands If Live is selected only links that are physically placed and active will be used to route demands If Planned Live is selected both active links and links that have been planned into the network will be used If New Planned Live is selected then active planned and new unplanned links will be used to route the demands You can view and modify the status of a link by clicking on the Location tab in the Links or Modify Link window Here we want to use all existing links to reroute the demands so select All The Min AW gain needed to use new route field is used to specify how much change in admin weight is required in order for a demand to be rerouted when the optimization process is executed If the admin weight Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc NETWORK GROOMING gained from rerouting a demand is less than the value specified in this field the demand will not be rerouted If this field is left empty all reroutes that result in an admin weight greater than zero will be implemented We will leave this field set to 1 8 The Release BW on current route before finding new route option sets whether or not the bandwidth used by the current placement of a demand will be ignored when the program 1s trying to find the optimal path for that demand If this option is checked the program will search for the optimal placement for the demand in the network without regard for the effect
130. d Boston 28 Now select Highlight All in the Demands through Link window Highlight All differs from the other path and route displays as this feature displays just a line segment between the source destination pairs of all the demands listed in the table Obtaining and Saving Network Information in the Console 29 In the Demands through Link window right click a row and select BW_Ovhd The console will be populated with bandwidth and overhead information Link FlowID From To Bandwidth TYPE Bandwidth Allocation xflow72 PHI LAX 1 70562M Z2A 1 70562M The Console dialog box provides an additional area where network details can be displayed Additionally it provides an alternate method of input for the user For some operations an Input textfield will appear within the console window Before attempting to enter input the user should ensure that the Console is the current active window by clicking inside the Input textfield 30 To record the Console information to a file on your client machine as it is generated right click on the console box and select Trace from the right click menu if the checkbox next to Trace is unchecked Then specify a filename on the client machine in which the console trace should be saved If the file already exists you will be asked whether or not to overwrite it append data to it or cancel the save operation To end the trace right click within the console window and select Trace again to u
131. d Files 22 2 Save Files 22 4 Saving Keystrokes for Batch Mode 22 5 Tracing Input 22 5 Feeding Keystrokes 22 5 Creating Your Own Keystrokes Input 22 5 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc INTRODUCTION Analysis Tools and IP MPLSView such as capacity planning simulations traffic studies and network T his user manual will guide you through the features in common between NPAT Network Planning and modifications for what if scenario analyses For users who do not need to use the program s graphical display there is a text mode version of the software referred to as bbdsgn or backbone design This is described in Chapter 22 Text Mode For an explanation of file input formats and output formats please refer to the File Format Guide For learning how to use the graphical user interface please refer to the remainder of this guide For detailed window by window information please refer to the General Reference Guide Following Along with the Examples in this Manual 1 Many ofthe chapters in this user guide will use a sample network to illustrate step by step procedures that you can follow along with These networks are located in the u wandl sample or WANDL_HOME sample folder on your server where WANDL HOME is the directory in which the server was installed In the sample directory u wandl sample IP navigate to one of the subdirectories and double click on a spec file This opens the network project 2
132. datadir or an absolute path should be specified that will override the datadir For example suppose there are two users amy and bob in the same user group with access to the files muxloc amy bblink amy and demand amy in u wandl amy For user amy a spec file created in u wandl amy may reference those files as follows Filename u wandl amy spec amy runcode amy datadir u wandl amy muxloc muxloc amy bblink bblink amy demand demand amy For user bob he may create a spec file in u wandl bob referencing the input files from u wandl amy by copying only the file spec amy and removing the comment in front of the datadir Because the input files are in a different directory as the spec file Bob can either specify their absolute path see example at left or specify a datadir containing the input files example at right Both of the following spec files in the following table are equally valid but the right one is more concise If the data dir is omitted in this case the default directory will be u wandl bob and the files will not be found Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc WHAT IS A SPEC FILE u wandlI bob spec bob u wandlI bob spec bob using default datadir u wandl bob specifying datadir u wandl amy runcode bob2 runcode bob muxloc u wandl amy muxloc amy datadir u wandl amy bblink u wandl amy bblink amy muxloc muxloc amy demand u wandl amy demand amy bblink bblink amy demand dem
133. dd 56 PVC s 8 intra node demands not added Initial 186 PVCs 130 placed 56 unplaced 0 deactivated Iteration 186 PVCs 173 placed 13 unplaced 0 deactivated Average hops 2 17 Max hops 5 0 paths exceed hop limit of 8 9 Els Total Link Cost 24 926BP Note that a demand can be recorded as unplaced in two kinds circumstances either there is no route or there is an explicitly specified route that is not valid 17 Select Design gt Backbone Design Click Yes to remove potentially redundant links and Yes to reroute the traffic Note The program uses heuristic algorithms to design the network It will not necessarily find the least expensive network topology on all occasions but it will give the cheapest one it finds The user is encouraged to try changing certain weights fixing certain links and making manual modifications like adding and removing links to influence the design Some of these control files parameters are explained toward the end of this chapter Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 7 DESIGN 14 18 Select File gt Save Network and follow the instructions in the console to save all the network environment files or simply File gt Save Network File gt Links to save only the new bblink file Give the spec file a new runcode like seq Compare Link Files 19 To view the differences between the incremental design and the original greenfield design select Design gt View Changes This w
134. dd a line to specify the cost between two nodes for which there is not currently a link so that it will be taken into account when the program tries to buy new links where there was none previously USING THE RSVBWFILE FILE 49 Another option is to use the rsvbwfile file In this way you can reserve a certain fixed amount or percentage of bandwidth that you do not want to be used on a link between two nodes Here 0 1 stands for 10 The reserved bandwidth per link is set to linkcapacity fatpct fixfat The user may set the reserved bandwidth using either a percentage an actual number or both If the network is using packet switched hardware the reserved bandwidth is usually expressed as a percentage since this is the most convenient The following is the file format nodel node2 fixfat fatpct NOO1 NOOO2 128000 0 1 If there is no specification in the rsvbwfile the fixfat and fatpct values will default to the global fixfat and fatpct values in the dparam file These global variables can also be changed from Tools gt Options gt Design from the Reserved Bandwidth options pane shown in Figure 14 13 below 50 Select the rsvbwfile from the File gt Load Network Files Network Files tab or from Tools gt Options gt Design Path Placement gt Reserved Bandwidth options pane Afterwards if you try to perform a design the program will take into account the reserved bandwidth when trying to ensure adequate capacity Note After you perf
135. dify gt Elements gt Demands query Then highlight one entry and click Modify Modify Demand iiini Properties Motion UserParameters Demand ID MyDrnd_2 Owner NONE v Node A hs v Node Z N3 v BW 3 000M 1 000m Copy gt ZA Pri Pre 02 02 Types RNRT IR NRT Service C Path Req Path Config Options v Re routable v Miscellaneous Comment Demands Paths for this demand To choose paths Click links nodes on map then right click in table Pathname Configured Route Add Row Delete Row Path Table ShowRoute ShowallPaths ok cancer Help Figure 9 11 Modify Demand Window 27 Clicking on the Types button will bring up the Demand Type Parameter Generation window Note that the type fields will vary depending on the hardware type Demand Type Parameter Generation General Bandwidth Traffic Type wi Data _ Voice Quality of Service CBR ORT NRT OABR OUBR UBR Terrestrial Dont Care Y Max Delay Fiber Dont Care Max Hop Encryption Dont Care Max Cost Util Frame Size OK Cancel Help Figure 9 12 Demand Type Parameter Generation Window General Tab Examine both the General and Bandwidth tabs After making modifications click OK 28 In the Modify Demand
136. diting a Spec File 4 6 Creating or Editing a Network File via the Text Editor 4 6 5 Loading a Network File 5 1 When to use 5 1 Prerequisites 5 1 Related Documentation 5 1 Recommended Instructions 5 1 Detailed Procedures 5 2 6 Using the Topology Windows 6 1 Contents 2 When to use 6 1 Prerequisites 6 1 Related Documentation 6 1 Recommended Instructions 6 1 Using the Legends 6 2 Planned Util legend 6 2 Customizing Nodes and Links in the Legends 6 5 Network Element Labels 6 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Node Labels 6 6 Link Labels 6 7 Bottom Bar Labels 6 7 Displaying Geographical Maps 6 8 Map Preferences 6 8 Inverting Colors 6 9 Topology Layout 6 10 Recalculate Layout 6 10 Distribute Selected Points 6 10 Circle Nodes 6 10 Straighten Nodes 6 10 Reset by Lat Lon 6 10 Node and Link Selection and Node Rearrangement 6 11 Graphical vs Geographical Coordinates 6 11 Node Selection 6 11 Link Selection 6 12 Rearranging Selected Points 6 12 Undo and Redo of Moved Nodes 6 13 Using the Drag Rotate Tool 6 14 Cut Copy and Paste 6 15 Logical Entities 6 15 Zooming In and Out and Using the Navigator Window 6 16 Grouping Functions 6 18 Viewing Your Network Model By Subview 6 19 Map Views 6 20 Opening Different Maps 6 20 Copy Map Layout 6 20 Accessing Node Information from the Map 6 21 Finding Network Elements on the Map 6 22 Export and Print 6 23 Print 6 23 Export 6 24 Export to Visio 6 25 Export Map
137. e The default directory can be overrided in file location specifications by specifying an absolute path for the file location Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 2 1 nO FILE TYPES This spec file indicates the location for separate files with information about nodes links and demands Each of these files has a special keyword to indicate the file type In the above example muxloc is a file type indicating node location information The nodeparam file is a file type indicating additional node parameters The bblink file provides backbone link information including the node endpoints The demand file provides planned traffic information including the source destination and bandwidth information For a more complete list of file types refer to the File Format Guide FILE NAMES In the above example the muxloc nodeparam bblink and demand files will be searched for in the respective files muxloc x nodeparam x bblink x and demand x in the data directory u wandl data example Note that the files are normally organized in the same directory the datadir Additionally they are named according to the file type and runcode where the file type is the prefix and the runcode is the suffix lt filetype gt lt runcode gt It is recommended to follow this convention to allow you to easily identify a network The program will be using this naming convention when saving a network For example suppose you save the above example using directo
138. e The path placement can always be adjusted later using the Design gt Demands gt Route Paths menu items in Design mode 6 Click OK The network will then be displayed Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc OPENING AND CLOSING A NETWORK PROJECT r IP MPLS iew WANDL Inc File Application Tools Netinfo Design Simulation Modiy Traffic Windows Help A Design Simulation S Modify m gy Layer2 Layer3 Router Model IGP OSPF WY Provisioned Util 18 link cost 2811428 5 3 EE Hi D 8 5 6 1 m Console ee Se ls Iteration 182 Demands 182 placed 0 unplaced 0 deactivated Demand Average hops 2 95 Max hops 7 0 paths exceed hop limit of 8 Over Subscription occurred at ZZ 22a ATL WDC DEF OC3 AvailBw 18 06M 33 215M LAX SdC DEF OC3 AvailBw 43 630M 17 17H 4 RP RSR AARAA ARRALAR ITR R II IST III IR III ces ececece ses SIT III STI III III III IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIS Ready jwwandlisamplefroutenffishispec mpls fish Mode View m Figure 3 2 Initially Displayed Standard Topology Window Upon Opening MPLS Fish spec file 7 Note that two subdirectories will be created under the project directory Log and Report e The Log directory is used to save error messages from parsing of input files such as demand file tunnel file path tables and tunnel path files e The Report directory is used to save all the reports created by rtserver fro
139. e Report Manager for a router network u wandl sample IP fish spec mpls fish after running a scripted simulation with Exhaustive Single Node Failure Exhaustive Single Link Failure options selected from the script window Note that only reports run in the same session become activated with the white icon A date stamp is indicated next to the report name to indicate when the report was generated Select one of the activated reports on the left pane of the Report Manager to view the contents of the report on the right pane Report Manager C Network Reports EH Simulation Reports A C3 Network Statistics Cy Peak Path Delay on 11 29 2012 E Peak Link Utilization on 11 29 2012 Peak Physical Link Utilization Reroute Statistics A C3 Detailed Simulation Cy Simulation Overview on 11 29 2012 G Oversubscribed Links on 1112972012 Failed Path on 11 29 2012 Rerouted Path on 1129 2012 A Upper Laver Simulation A Shared Risk Link Groups Up Down Sequence C1 Configuration Reports C Customized Reports Figure 15 12 Simulation Report The generated reports and their respective filenames include the following Peak Link Utilization Report DVSIM For each link this report records the worst utilization that was encountered during the exhaustive failure simulation and which particular failure event triggered it See more details below Peak Path Delay PATHDELAY For each demand this report records the worst delay and worst distance t
140. e a template to simplify the add node process from Modify gt Elements gt Element Templates gt Node 10 Finally in the Nodes window traverse through the table to verify the three newly added nodes as shown in Figure 8 4 C Network Info Network Nodes ID Name Hardware NPA NX Lata Country IP_Address x N1 Node1 MUX T32 271 1224 US oa N2 Node2 MUX 732 868 224 lUS N3 Node3 MUX 773 223 358 US Summary AM 3of3 displayed Advanced User Para m eters Location Country US NPANXX Lata 73227 1 224 Demands Lat Lon 40 57 74 532 WH EH 5081 1455 Other Nodes As Highlight Highlight All Figure 8 4 Resulting Nodes window with 3 newly added nodes 11 Click on Close to close the Nodes window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 8 3 ADDING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS Viewing Node Labels on Map 12 13 14 Adding a Link 15 16 17 18 19 To view the node IDs that correspond to each node on the topology map right click on the map and select the Labels gt Node Labels option When asked which nodes to label in the dialog box as shown in the following window select All for Show Labels For and select ID for What Text Then click OK Node Labels Show Labels for All O Mone gt Site ID C Weight O Only Current Selection 2 Add Current Selection O Remove Current Selection Customize Cancel
141. e contains 200 lines To see the next page click the Go to Next Page button 5 Click on the plus sign to the left of the Link Reports folder icon to view the link related reports Then click on the Planned Link Utilization Report A file will automatically be created on the server side and the Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 19 3 a contents will be displayed in a table in the right panel This report gives you backbone link utilization based on demands loaded on the network The console indicates that the file is saved in LKUTIL mpls fish Click the Explanation button above the report for explanatory information about the report including descriptions for each column Click Close to close the subsequent window By default the reports are saved on the server in the Output Path directory indicated in the File Manager Click the Refresh button in the File Manager to see the reports that were generated Customizing the Report View 8 10 11 Enter a query string in the Filter section of the Report Manager s right pane to filter the rows of the Report Manager This string can be a partial string Then click Search to limit the rows to those containing that 663899 string Use to retrieve all entries Note that this 1s case sensitive You can resize columns rows and sort columns in the Report Manager as follows To resize columns and or rows put your mouse pointer on the dividing
142. e load balancing and end to end delay and loss calculations Hardware Specific Hardware specific device models have been developed by Juniper as a Device Library result of close working relationships with the major device vendors This ensures the accuracy and precision of the model as well as the support of many device specific features The WANDL software includes various data extraction tools to convert network data for example router configuration files into a format readable by the WANDL software Please refer to Converting Your Files to WANDL File Format on I 6 Path Assignments For an existing backbone network the optimal layout or path assignment can be determined which satisfies all demand constraints Demand constraints may include media preferences diverse paths and hardware bandwidth overhead calculations Available paths can be found even when the actual hardware fails to find a path If the hardware switch supports user specified paths then paths found using the model can be downloaded to the real network Failure Simulation Exhaustive and customizable failure scenarios can be simulated to analyze and evaluate a networks resiliency and topology Tariffs The WANDL software can help reduce private line leasing costs monthly recurring and non recurring components by producing designs that satisfy user requirements and constraints while maintaining a minimal cost You can specify your own pricing tables which will then
143. e map s bottom bar will display a brief message that a link was added A blue link will be drawn between the two endpoints Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADDING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS 20 Move the Add Link window back into view Now try to add a second link named Link N2 to N3 between nodes N2 and N3 This time deselect the Auto Add on Mouse Clicks checkbox To specify the location click on the Location tab E Add Link Apply Template Default v _ Auto Add on Mouse Clicks Properties Location Partition User Parameters Choose Location Using O Mouse Node ID Domain NONE NodeA N2 CardA Node Z py3 wi CadzZ Close Heip Figure 8 7 Add Link Window Location Tab 21 Click on the NodelD radio button to choose the location using node IDs Then select N2 for Node A and N3 for Node Z Click Add Note When saving specified switch information for links e g card port channel you must select Node ID under the Node Reference section of the Report Options window Tools gt Options gt Report Otherwise the switch information will not be saved to file 22 Click back to the Properties tab of the Add Link window Add a third link named Link N3 to N1 using the same method used for Link N2 to N3 After completing this addition click Close to close the Add Link window Verify the newly added links in the Link
144. e map surrounding the nodes you want to select To do so hold down your mouse s left button when the pointer is somewhere on the map and drag your mouse so that the pointer moves down and to the right before you let go You should see a rectangle on the map If not go to your Map Preferences window and change the Mouse Drag Lines color as described in step 27 on page 6 8 and step 31 on page 6 9 When you let go the nodes contained in that rectangle and the links connecting them should be highlighted Note that dragging the rectangle without holding down lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift gt will also cause a fresh selection of nodes To avoid this make sure lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift gt are held down while dragging the rectangle Figure 6 14 Selecting Nodes by Dragging a Rectangle 38 To remove the highlight on one of these nodes lt Ctrl gt click or lt Shift gt click it and the highlight will disappear To remove all highlights click in an empty background space in the topology window to deselect all nodes Alternatively you can remove all highlights by selecting Refresh from the right click menu of the topology view 39 You can turn off node labels of all or selected nodes Select several nodes Then select Node Labels from the Labels menu of the right click menu of the topology map Select the Remove Current Selection radio button and click OK The labels for those selected nodes will be removed Copyright 2014 Juniper Netwo
145. e modifications Select Network gt Elements gt Owners Right click the owner WANDL and then select View Demands to view the demands that are owned by the selected owner MONE WAMEL Figure 10 5 Viewing demands owned by WANDL Demands belonging to owner WWANDL Actions IF A Mode IP Er Type PrilPre Current ID Model fow ATL BOS Fa0 0kK R 02 02 ATL WD ee flows m 2 PAL 8 0K R02 02 ATL HOL d rer Figure 10 6 Demands belonging to the selected owner Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING SITES OWNERS ETC 15 To graphically view a line segment between the starting and ending points of each demand click Highlight All and take a look at the yellow highlights on the Map window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Admin Weight Metric Rules 10 6 The admin weight tool allows the user to specify the rules that should automatically be used to calculate the admin weights metrics for links which do not already have a specific admin weight metric specified in the bblink or the linkdist file This weight is then taken into consideration for routing when the protocol is looking for the shortest path to take SPECIFYING LINK CHARACTERISTICS The user can specify which links to apply an admin weight formula to by matching those links with certain link characteristics that must be met Links can be matched against characteristics such as protocol t
146. e node name hardware type and location information The content of the message in the bottom bar of the map window can also be modified as described in Bottom Bar Labels on page 6 7 13 To get basic link information place the pointer over a link Information such as link trunk type and planned utilization is displayed in the status area If the planned utilization for the A gt Z direction differs from the Z gt A direction the link will be colored in two halves and the planned utilization will be displayed in the format planned utilization for the A gt Z direction planned utilization for the Z gt A direction 7 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION ow Wap Standard Planned Util h 100 0 90 0 a PHILADELPH cs if 5 s a a E LINKTS LA SJ LINES OCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6g0 0 7195 1 1104 Figure 7 4 Status Area Bottom Bar Displays Link Information 14 Node and link properties can also be displayed on the map by using the map right click menu s Labels options 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 and customizing the label You can view the node information via the topology map by right clicking over a node and selecting the View gt Nodes under Pointer item from the popup menu There may be one or more nodes depending on how many nodes are in the immediate vicinity of the point that was clicked upon Also if you open a network in
147. e the routing method in the Design gt Partition pane Click Next to make the changes The following window will indicate information on the routes that changed related to the path path cost and hop count You can save this information to a report using the Report button or display an individual demand s path on the map by selecting the row and clicking Show Paths flow63 DETROIT WASHDC DET CHI WDC DET BOS DET CHI WDC 12275 13087 slows DETROIT ATLANTA DET CHI WDC ATL _ DET BOS DET CHI VWDC ATL 2958 5750 Xflow63 WASHDC DETROIT WDC CHI DET WWDC CHI DET BOS DET 2275 5067 Show Paths Report Figure 17 3 Changed Routes Click Next when you are ready to continue This will bring up the Save Changes screen in which you can decide whether or not to save the metric changes or to roll them back Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ROUTE OPTIMIZATION a Save Changes ANI Save all changes made to link metrics and demand routes D Yes save all changes No abandon all changes Figure 17 4 Save Changes Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 17 3 Be 17 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc NETWORK GROOMING the network operator to optimize the placement of a selected set of demands based on minimization of the T his chapter describes the Network Grooming feature in the WANDL software The
148. e user enters a filename the contents of that file will be read Note that when entering the file name either the full path where the file is located must be entered or else the relative path from the current working directory e Ifthe user enters none the current information is removed For example if none was entered at the backbone link file query all the backbone links would be removed e Ifthe user simply hits lt Return gt no action is taken The file specified in the current settings has already been read in To reset the settings according to the contents of a file the file name must be entered even if it is the same as the current file The reason for this is that the contents of the file might have changed after it was initially loaded For example this could be the result of using the Modify Configuration option or manual edits to the file using a text editor 11 In the event that the user does not remember the name of the file press lt Return gt to get back to the Select q Quit UNIX prompt on the Read Files Menu then type and press lt Return gt to escape into a UNIX shell 12 The user may then use any of the following commands to list all the files in the working directory UNIX command Corresponding action List contents of present working directory S Is l List contents of present working directory in long format Is lt List contents of present working directory in long format and sort by ti
149. e values have been selected click OK The new record will then be updated in the Admin Weights window 20 In the Admin Weights window you will see the records displayed Select and highlight one of the rows to view the detailed information in the bottom half of the window 21 To modify any record s select and highlight the record s then click on the Modify button A Modify Admin Weight window will appear allowing you to change any values in the window When you are finished with the modification click OK 22 To delete any record s select the record s in the Admin Weights table and click on the Delete button 23 When modifications are done click on the Close button to close the Admin Weights window Note When you save the network environment a file called admincost runcode will be created This file can also be created manually and specified in the spec file Refer to the chapter on Control Files in the File Format Guide for more details 24 To view link metrics on the map right click on the topology map Go to Labels gt Link Labels gt Show Link Metrics and the distances for all links on the map will appear next to each link as shown in Figure 10 9 Note Keep in mind that the weights defined in Admin Weight are only used when a more specific distance metric is not specified in the bblink or linkdist files 25 Alternatively you may view link metrics by selecting Network gt Ele
150. ect of the demand on the network load click on Modify gt Update Network State or click the Update button in the action mode toolbar Click Yes if a dialog box asks to update the path placement Your topology map will now look something like the following with a link partially of color green and partially of color blue If not check for the map that you have selected Utilization Legends gt Planned Util Figure 8 12 Triangle Net With One 1 M Demand The green color originating from N1 indicates that the demand is placed in the direction from N1 to N2 rather than the reverse direction Take a look at the console message shown below which notes that of 1 PVCs 1 was placed Iteration 1 PVCs 1 placed 0 unplaced 0 deactivated Average hops 1 00 Max hops 1 0 paths exceed hop limit of 20 ankay Total Link Coet o J1 cl6 Links Not Priced 2 Tip You can make a template to simplify the add demand process from Modify gt Elements gt Element Templates gt Demand Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 8 7 29 Next try adding multiple demands at a time Select Modify gt Elements gt Demands Add gt Multiple Demands to bring up the Add Multiple Demands window 30 Now this tutorial will guide you in adding a demand for each source destination node pair In this window specify MyDmd in the Demand ID Prefix textbox and 1 after This will cause your demand IDs to be automatically g
151. ected the file click Ok to show the comparison 5 The File Comparison Revision Manager window should now display the two versions side by side in a table display as shown in Figure 21 9 WANDL File Comparison NPAT WANDL file comparison File Types i 1 spacenpatbt 0919 sample routerfishidema 2 juiwandlisampleirouteridogidemand dog E bblink 2 Demand Id Node A Node Z demand Amow JATL BOS flow 0 ATL SDG demand Aggregated j ni ATL SFO eset ffowt2 ATL SIC muxloc Afow13 ATL WDC nodeparam flow1 4 BOS CHI flow 5 BOS DAL flow1 6 BOS DEN flowt 7 BOS DET flow18 BOS _ HOU 2 flow1 9 BOS LAX Mflow2 ATL CHI IL UL A Anow20 BOS NYC flow21 BOS PHI 2 flow22 BOS SDG Mnow23 BOS SFO Afow24 BOS SJC Mnow25 BOS WDC CHI DAL DEE HELL LL II flow18 BOS HOU 558028 R 42Z 02 02 fowls BOS HOU 558028 R A2zZ 02 02 BOS DET CHI WDC ATL HOU BOS NYC PHI WDC ATL HOU 1 4 Il D D B 50 differences Last updated April 19 2002 9 40 11 AM EDT Figure 21 9 Comparing demand mpls fish and demand dog 21 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc FILE COMPARISON TOOLS 6 Scroll down the left table to view the details of that revision file Next scroll down the right table to simultaneously scroll both windows To scroll on only the right window click on the padlock ic
152. efault the admin password is the same as wandl user although this can be changed EQUIPMENT COST TABLES Although multiple equipment cost tables can be uploaded in the tool only two vendors are currently supported Cisco and Juniper For each vendor two cost tables are supported 1 Chassis table Includes the chassis Capex the depreciation period the percentage of maintenance fees and the equipment commissioning date is provided The commissioning date is used to calculate the depreciation costs Once the depreciation period is elapsed the report includes no more any depreciated cost 2 Card table Includes the router card line Capex the depreciation period the percentage of maintenance fees Both tables are linked all the cards from a given router start their depreciation according to the commissioning date that is specified in the chassis table for the very same router Note that a consistent financial unit has to be used for all cost tables CHASSIS COST TABLE The following table is a sample chassis cost table in CSV format for Cisco router ROUtTSE Koper ee Vendor Device Group Start Date Name Chassis Type List Price Discount Depreciation Period Maintenance Cisco 1 9 2001 HOU Cat6k MSFC 120000 50 60 10 Cisco 1 10 2001 NYC CAatok MSFC 120000 50 60 10 Cisco g yl 1172001 CHI 120087 PRP 120000 50 60 10 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc NETWORK COST ALLOCATION Note that the first line
153. electing Links from the left pane same as Network gt Elements gt Links 5 For the node and link windows there are more attributes than those displayed in the top table To customize the columns included in the table right click on the column header and select Table Options Select the columns you want to view from the Available Item s list add them to the Selected Item s list and rearrange the column order using the up and down arrows Press OK for the changes to be applied 6 The columns in the upper table can be sorted by clicking on the column header or right clicking on the table header and selecting Sort Ascending or Sort Descending Sorting is particularly useful for fields such as link utilization since it enables you to quickly see which links are most highly utilized 7 To filter through the list of nodes links or demands with a certain search criteria select the node view and click the window s Filter button dah For example click the Filter button in the node window to open up the Find Nodes window as shown in Figure 7 3 L Find Nodes lt Properties Location wp Name LON Country All mA IP Address NPAM Lata Hardware a v Search preference s Exact match ei Exact match as substring O Wildcards and Regular Expression Syntax Figure 7 3 Find Nodes Window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 7 3 VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMAT
154. ements may fit entirely within the Landscape view the groups sometimes do not Because of the aspect ratio the discs will generally become ellipses Hence you may also want to resize a disc by selecting a disc and then dragging the green handles Figure 6 39 Visio drawing after coloring and sending discs to back Fill selected Right click one of the selected disc s disc s and select Format gt Fill Then select a color Send selected Right click one of the selected lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt b Visio 2002 shape s to Back disc s and select Send to Back lt Ctrl gt b Visio 2000 and earlier Send all discs to Tools gt Macros gt WANDL gt GroupDis the back csToBack Resize a disc Select a disc Then drag the green handles 6 28 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS VISIO TIPS Subject Tips Dragging a Node Make sure you are clicking on the node and not the link or any displayed map borders It helps to zoom in around the node so you can see it clearly Furthermore clicking inside the node and not on the edge of the node may help to avoid accidentally resizing the node If you drag a node the links connected to it will move with it The opposite endpoint of the link will remain fixed But if you drag a link it will be torn away from its nodes This is the correct behavior for Visio s connectors Changing a Links Click on the link then drag the link s center point to make it Curvat
155. ence Guide Recommended Instructions 1 Se ee ae os Se Open the Net Groom Fetch Demands window Select the source nodes of demands whose paths will be considered for optimization Select the set of demands to be optimized based on Demand Type Max BW and Max Priority Set general options for Net Groom Click OK to open the Net Groom window Optimize demands Display the paths of the optimized demands in the Map window View a report of the optimized demands and paths Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 18 1 Ne Detailed Procedures Once you have opened your network and verified that there are nodes links and demands placed you may begin this section 1 Switch to Design mode The Design drop down menu should be activated 2 Selec Design gt TE Tunnels gt Net Groom or Design gt Demands gt Net Groom for demands 3 A Net Groom Fetch Demands window will appear Het Groom Fetch Demands Source Nodes for Demands Demand Selection Options All Nodes Filter Demand Type A T Filter From Map m Any 7 Max Buy Remove Max Priority Read From File General Options Use links of this status when finding new routes All T Min AVY gain needed to use new route i Release BY on current route before finding new route Son demands in report by Reroute Order Y Set Routing Method Figure 18 2 Net Groom Fetch Demands Selecting Demands for Net Gro
156. enerated starting from MyDmd 1 and counting up For the bandwidth specify 750K for Node A to Node Z where Node A and Node Z will be specified in the next step 31 32 Under the Placement AxZ section press the Filter button in the Node A section to filter all the source nodes for the multiple demands The Find Nodes window will appear DO oo RIT RIT ITR RS ARR TRS RITES Properties Location ID Name IP Address Hardware AI v Search preference s Country All v NPAM 7 Lata O Exact match Exact match as substring O Wildcards and Regular Expression Syntax Figure 8 13 Find Nodes Window Leave the fields empty and click OK to fetch all nodes Nodes N1 N2 and N3 will be listed under Node A as the source nodes 33 34 For Node Z click on the Copy A gt Z to use the same nodes as the destination nodes Your window should now look something like Figure 8 14 Properties issiam az za Apply Template Default v B 750k Demand ID Prefix MyDmd GF i Type Pri Pre 2 7 Service NONE Nf Path Req haa Path Config Options v Comment Owner NONE Count 4 8 8 Placement A x Z Type Node x Node A 1 rNode Z N1 Filter N1 Filter N2 N2 N3 Filter From Map N3 Filter From Map Remove Remove Copy A
157. enshots Below is a screenshot for the rerouting of a demand with old path in red and rerouted path in green The demand being rerouted is indicated in the upper left corner Warning For a successful screenshot you should not move the application window around or move other applications in front of the WANDL application Otherwise the screenshot may be shifted or blocked flow13 18 link cost 2811428 Figure 15 15 Auto Screenshot of the rerouting of flow13 15 14 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc PATH PLACEMENT his chapter describes path placement for demands The WANDL software can be used to route unplaced demands or improve existing demand paths You can also use the WANDL software to improve path diversity This module assumes that there is an existing backbone network and tries to satisfy all demands and constraints through optimal calculation of the best assignment or layout The constraints handled by the program include maximum number of link hops media preference diversity path constraints and hardware bandwidth overhead calculations This module can help the user evaluate whether the current network has enough bandwidth for new requirements entered in as demands It can also be used to search for available paths in the backbone when the hardware fails to find a path If the user s hardware device supports the path select path preferred or path required feature the user can have the hardware set up to use the p
158. ent Values sections of the window give you possible fields that can be checked the relation lt gt lt gt to check and the value to compare the key to For example for a text filter for the link window you could specify Avail BW ZA lt 1M or Avail BW AZ lt 1M or Util AZ gt 0 9 or Util ZA gt 0 9 to find all links with available bandwidth less than 1M or utilization greater than 0 9 in at least one direction This can be directly typed into the query field The Insert buttons provide shortcuts to typing Commonly users will use a combination of typing and inserting when constructing a query For more details please refer to the Reference Guide chapter Network Node Link and Demand Map Popup Menus 11 Node link and demand properties can also be retrieved directly from the map by right clicking over a link or a node Depending on the action mode that is currently selected View Design Simulation or Modify and the network element that was right clicked over node or link a popup menu will be displayed with element specific and mode specific menu items For a listing of the menus per mode and element refer to the Reference Guide chapter on Topology To learn more about the use of the other right click menu items related to the topology window refer to Chapter 6 Using the Topology Windows 12 To get basic node information place your mouse pointer over a node Notice the status bar at the bottom of the map will display th
159. enu of the right click menu of the topology window Map Preferences 27 To change global color settings for your client such as the background and foreground colors select Tools gt Options gt Map Preferences from the pull down main menu to get the following window in Figure 6 11 The changes you make here will be saved on your client machine Press Apply or OK after each change To reset to the default settings you can click on the Defaults button General Map Preferences Config Editor Currency Table Background Foreground Text aay Grouping Discs Discrete Event Simulation Selected Objects L Failure Simulation gt Ligntwara Failed Elements DE Integrity Checks Backup Links Eu LSP Tunnel Attributes Virtual Trunks Map Preferences Country Borders Mouse Drag Lines nr FontSize 12 Paint Discs Translucent v v Draw Mult Links as Curves _ Animate Distribute Points v Animate Paths _ Show VT as normal Figure 6 11 Map Preferences Window 28 Unclick the Draw Mult Links as Curves checkbox to straighten out curved links 6 8 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS 29 Enter in 12 for Font Size for increased readability 30 Ifa network has groups note that you can display the groups using different paint settings by selecting from the Paint Discs pull down menu The options are translucent default setting quick rings opaque
160. er will now show features that the two tools have in common 1 In File Comparison right click on the left panel of the window to get a pop up menu as shown in Figure 21 7 In Revision Manager this is the submenu for the right click menu option Compare Compare two VWANDL files Display Option Figure 21 7 Right Click Pop Up Menu 2 Select Compare the selection with file to compare the currently selected file with another one in the file system 3 A Select file to be compared window will appear as shown in Figure 21 8 that will allow you to select the path of the directory in which the file you wish to perform a comparison is saved You may also type in the text box next to File 2 the full path of the file you wish to compare Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 21 5 FILE COMPARISON TOOLS Select bblink file to be compared Select a file to be compared Path uwandlisampletrouteridog Go Selected file s Note Selecting different type of WANDL file is not allowed ispace npats4 110 samplesrouterfish bblink mpls fish File 2 u wandl samplefrouter dog bblink dog Figure 21 8 Select File to be Compared Note Comparison can only be performed on two files of the same format Therefore the selected file will be shown in RED if the two files do not have the same filename prefix and it will be shown in BLUE if the two files do have the same filename prefix 4 Once you have sel
161. ersubscribed i e utilized above 100 the user might want to see those specific links by color on the topology map To do this right click on any part of the color bar and select Change Max A window will open asking you to enter a new maximum value for the color bar as shown below Enter the number and click OK 4 Please enter a new maximum value for the slider 100 0 Cancel Figure 6 4 New Max selection window Note Settings made for items in the Legends pane will be saved per spec file for future sessions The Planned Utilization legend settings are also applied to the Peak Utilization Measured Utilization and Demand CoS Utilization views The legend setting is shared among the four views 7 To display only links of high utilization right click the color bar and select Show None All of the links will disappear Then right click the top most segment and select Show Selected Color Any link with that selected color will be shown on the map 8 To restore all the links select Show All A link of a particular utilization can also be hidden by deselecting Show Selected Color Note that the utilization colors on both sides of the link must be hidden in order for the link to be hidden 9 To zoom into a particular segment right click the color bar and select Change Viewing Range and select a new viewing range e g 0 0 1 0 for the range from 0 to 1 This feature may be helpful in cases where
162. es demand demand triangle3 Circuit definition file dparam dparam triangle3 parameters usercost none user defined link cost file linkdist none user defined link distance file nodeweight nodeweight triangle3 user defined node weight amp bandwidth limit DPARAM TRIANGLE3 hwvendor GENATM MUXLOC TRIANGLE3 N1 NODE 732 271 US 462459N 07758253W N2 NODE2 732 868 N3 NODE3 773 223 US 415042N 0874149W BBLINK TRIANGLE3 LinkName Node Node Vendor BwType Misc LINK N1 TO N2 N1 N2 DEF ei LINK N3 TO N1 N1 N3 DEF Loi LINK N2 TO N3 N2 N3 DEF i Ti DEMAND TRIANGLE3 Dmd N1 to N2 N1 N2 1000000 R AZZ NRT 02 02 LINK Ni TO N2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADDING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS MyDmd 1 N2 N3 750000 R A2Z NRT 07 07 LINK N2 TO N3 MyDmd 2 N2 N1 750000 R A2Z NRT 07 07 LINK N1 TO N2 MyDmd 3 N3 N2 750000 R A2Z NRT 07 07 LINK N2 TO N3 MyDmd 4 N3 N1 750000 R A2Z NRT 07 07 LINK N3 TO N1 MyDmd 5 N1 N2 750000 R A22 NRT 07 07 MyDmd 6 N1 N3 750000 R A2Z NRT 07 07 LINK N3 TO N1 GRAPHCOORD TRIANGLE3 worldcoord window 10211 15892 17271 17271 mktp 3 marker type node npa nxx latitude longitude or node npa nxx graph v graph h N1 999 999 67 0119 95 1504 N2 732 BGG 32 0560 32 2654 No 219 545 33 14063 166 206 NODEPARAM TRIANGLE3 Format Example NO01 MUX N1 N2 N3 MUX MUX MUX Appendix B Deriving npa nxx from CLLI codes using wanpricer Note that wanpricer is a special fea
163. es and links in any order and study the impact of the failure The program will display which circuits are disconnected and the new paths taken if the circuits are rerouted successfully It is also possible to look for worst case scenarios by placing low bandwidth demands first To study the impact of preempt priority the bumpflag parameter may be used If bumpflag is set to 0 lower priority paths are NOT bumped by higher priority paths If this parameter is set the preempt value specified in the demand file is not considered This allows the user to study the impact of the bump feature Use these procedures when you want to perform a simulation using the WANDL client Alternatively you can perform a simulation in text mode Note The reserved bandwidth specified by the fat parameter and the reserved bandwidth file are both ignored by the simulation module the reserved bandwidth is only used for design purposes The hopdelay parameter is also ignored Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 15 1 SIMULATION 15 Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you must have created a spec file as described in Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model or opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You then should continue with these procedures to perform simulations To follow along with this example you should use the spec file spec dog in WANDL HOME sample original rou
164. es can be viewed from within a web browser such as Firefox Internet Explorer version 9 or later Opera or Safari Alternatively you can use a third party SVG plugins such as Adobe SVG Viewer There are also tools to import export and manipulate SVG graphics For example Adobe Illustrator and CorelDraw are third party tools can import and export the SVG format 113 To save to SVG format on your client machine select the Export option from the map s right click menu and save using the Scalable Vector Graphics SVG format Additionally you can choose to include a title comment legends and date time in the SVG file Note that the resulting SVG file depends upon existing settings in the topology map These settings include whether the world map should be displayed the boundaries of the world map and whether node and link labels should be displayed 114 Alternatively to export the open maps to SVG for viewing from the WANDL Web Interface select File gt Export to Web which will export both network reports and SVG topology map These map s can then be viewed from http serverip 8091 substitute serverip with your application server s IP address Select Reports gt Network Reports Then click on the link to the desired network and click on Standard Topology KS Main Menu gt Network Reports gt u wandl sample router ish spec mpls fish Generata Beton BEI Available Web Reports a and Topology Maps Gene
165. es define node CHI s city as Chicago and state as Illinois and node DEN s city as Denver and state as Colorado The usrparam file consists of 2 types of lines one to identify the attribute names and the other to provide the attribute value pairs The first keyword defines the ElementType NODE LINK or TUNNEL e If this keyword is followed by 2 commas the attribute names are provided e If this keyword is followed by 1 comma the attribute value pairs are provided for the indicated element ATTRIBUTE DECLARATIONS ElementType list of attribute names separated by spaces ATTRIBUTE VALUE PAIRS FOR NODES AND LINKS fElementType ElementName Attribute Value ATTRIBUTE VALUE PAIRS FOR TUNNELS ElementType HeadEnd ElementName Attribute Value Note that in the case of tunnels the element has to be identified not only by the tunnel name but also by the source device since a tunnel name is only required to be unique for its host and not network wide In the example above the tunnel whose attribute value pair is defined has ts headend in node ATL and has the tunnel name RATLCHI Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 11 5 ees Link Rules The Link Rules feature allows you to create rules with user defined conditions and relations which may include the User Parameters that were covered above Links that match all these conditions are then compared to a specified Link Template If these links contain propertie
166. es that facility OTHER CONTROL FACTORS 61 You can set a node to be single ended by specifying SINGLE END in the miscellaneous field of a muxloc file node entry to control design This specifies that a node is single ended 1 e it can only be connected to one other node in the network From the WANDL client you can make this modification in Modify mode with the Modify Nodes menu Set single end to be True 62 In the same file in the miscellaneous field you can also set a node to be reliable to influence diversity design by specifying FAIL 0 This is supported in both the WANDL client Modify Node window Design Properties tab and in text mode Specifying FAIL 0 marks a node so that it is not brought down during the diversity design or failure simulation processes 63 You can specify a higher hop delay to encourage the program to choose paths with less hops since the length of a path is calculated by the design subroutines using the following formula length of links weight of nodes number of nodes hopdelay Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN Note that hop delay is set to 0 during network simulation 64 The maximum number of intra lata hops allowed during the design can be set from the Tools gt Options gt Design window Note that this only applies to designs in the United States The corresponding parameter in the dparam file is called maxintralink See the File Format Guide for mo
167. esizing the links accordingly 31 Open the sample network select Modify mode and modify the demands via Modify gt Elements gt Demands 32 In the Modify Demands window select Modify gt All Entries and select Multiply BW by __ entering the value 1000 to increase the bandwidth of each demand 1000 or tenfold 33 Select Design gt Design Options and then select Resize wv IP MPLS View Options 207 General Backbone Design Resize El Backbone Design Diversity Resize Additional Trunk Penalty 2000 0 Config Editor Demand Tunnel Sizing Link Type Candidate Path Placement 4 Failure Simulation Integrity Checks O User Specified Indicated Map Preferences AGGR 10G Report VoIP O Types in Tariff OK Cancel Help Figure 14 9 Resize Options 34 Indicate the Link Type Candidates to be used for the Resize For the aggregated link AGGR select the bandwidth increment that can be used for the design With the default of 10G links will be resized to increments of 10G AGGR10G AGGR20G AGGR30G etc 35 For this example the bandwidth will be changed to 1G so the links can be resized to increments of 1G AGGRIG AGGR2G AGGR3G etc 36 The Additional Trunk Penalty field allows for a penalty to be set for the purchase of each additional trunk so as to discourage the replacement of a high capacity trunk with several smaller capacity trunks during resize The default value is 2000 Cop
168. essential demand priority to 15 The program would subsequently design a topology where all demands with priority 0 to 10 would be able to survive any site or link failure while those with priority 11 to 15 would be able to survive any link failure Note Different hardware types differ in their priority numbering schemes In many a lower number indicates a higher priority However there are a few hardware types in which it is the other way around Check with your hardware s documentation to see which scheme is used The WANDL software mimics the behavior of the hardware For those who find it easier to edit the dparam design parameters file directly the same values present in the diversity design options can all be specified under the Design Parameters and Diversity Design Parameters sections of the dparam file Please refer to the table below as well as the description in the dparam file indicating the valid values for each variable Diversity Design Option dparam Equivalent Variable Set Critical Demand Priority sitedvpri Any demands with the same or higher priority is classified as critical or satisfying any single site and link failure Set Essential Demand Priority linkdvpri Any demands with the same or higher priority is classified as essential or satisfying any single link failure Link Failure Definition chk 1 link Site Diversity Definition chksitenode Diversity Design Use usepreemp
169. estination nodes and the bandwidth of the demand and then update the network state as described in step 29 on page 8 8 pa Switch back to view mode and save your changes as described in step 43 on page 8 10 9 View the resulting text files as described in step 45 on page 8 10 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 8 1 Detailed Procedures 1 Create from scratch a spec file of a hardware type that is available to you as described in Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model In this example we will use Generic ATM If you have a router hardware type you may select that type for your greenfield network then follow along with these general procedures 2 Switch to modify mode by clicking on the Modify button in the action mode toolbar under the program menus as shown in Figure 8 1 The Modify pull down menu gets activated TP View ke Design Simulation ah Figure 8 1 Switching to Modify Mode Adding a Node 3 Select the Nodes option from the Modify pull down menu You will see the window shown in Figure 8 2 Network Hardware Lata Count IP_Address Name Zz 2g Summary Demands Other Nodes te H Add Modify Delete Highlight Highlight All Figure 8 2 Nodes window in Modify mode 4 Click on the Add button to add a new node to the network An Add Node window will appear Properties Advanced Properties Design Properties User Parameters Ch
170. forcedesign Set forcedesign to 1 Then set an ExtraTrunkPenalty with a value of at least 100 The extra trunk penalty to allow but penalize additional trunks at the node FACILITY AWARE DESIGN 57 Another way to indicate current capacity for links is to use facility aware design In the bblink file indicate for each link the number of identical links that could be supported between the link s endpoints using the AVFAC lt number gt parameter in the miscellaneous field For example Linkname NodeA NodeZ Vendor Count TrunkType Misc LINK1 A B DEE 1 OC3 AVFAC 10 58 If there is available capacity at an existing facility the program will prefer creating links at that facility up to the specified number over creating links that would require new facilities To influence the penalty for creating new links use the dsgntrunkpenalty parameter in the dparam file Setting a very high dsgntrunkpenalty can be used to restrict new links to be added at existing facilities 59 After performing a design additional links added at a facility will also be indicated in the facility file as being in the same facility 60 In the case that all the links of a facility are removed during the pruning part of design but the AVFAC is set one gray link will appear for that facility with the Admin Status of Delete The gray link will not factor into the cost nor be used as part of the routing It serves only as a placeholder in case a future design run requir
171. g from the database you can add it using the following steps ADDING A COUNTRY 55 To add a country edit the u wandl db country countryloc txt code av lat av lon max lat max lon min lat min lon exchangename continent continent Asia N North America E Europe S South America F Africa O Ocean Use dash if uncertain CREATING A CITY DATABASE FOR A COUNTRY 56 Create a file in u wandl bin or SWANDL HOME bin if u wandl is not found with the name CountryCode lat substituting CountryCode with the two letter countrycode Enter into the file one city per line using the following fields 2letterCountryCode Latitude Longitude Gateway City For the gateway field enter G for gateway or if not a gateway Example CN lat CN 51 1 114 017 G Calgary CN 53 5667 113 517 G Edmonton CN 99218633 118 883 G GrandePrairie CN 52 8833 118 067 G Jasper 57 Run u wandl bin country20bj or SWANDL HOME bin country2obj if u wandil is not found in the u wandl bin directory country20b 2letterCountryCode Example cd u wandl bin country20bj CN 58 Make a backup of the current obj file in u wandl db country that you want to replace Then move the new obj file to u wandl db country or SWANDL HOME db country if u wandl is not found Note By moving an obj file you will be replacing the previous country obj file not adding onto it 59 You may need to close your currently opened netwo
172. g order to maintain an unique identity for each element LOGICAL ENTITIES 62 To save a selection of nodes and or links for later use right click over a selected node or link and select Selection to Logical Entity Enter in a name for the Logical Entity On the Standard Map select the Logical Entities option from the first dropdown menu To paste this entity on the map drag and drop the entity from the left pane onto the map 63 Alternatively you can also save a link as a logical entity without its attached nodes by selecting Link to Logical Entity Unattached Enter in a name for this Logical Entity On the Standard Map select the Logical Entities option from the first dropdown menu To paste this entity on the map drag and drop the entity from the left pane onto the map Then click the link s source node followed by its destination node Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 15 i Zooming In and Out and Using the Navigator Window You may notice that some of the links are very small and not as easy to spot Hence the zoom in and out functions and Navigator window become useful The zoom options are available both from the topology view right click menu and the right pane toolbar Hint Mouse over the toolbar icons see Help text 64 Click on the globe icon on the toolbar to display the navigator pane as shown in Figure 6 21 5 da Map Standard Provisioned Util 18 link cost 2611426 Navigator
173. g the report formats you can choose from are CSV for a comma separated file HTML for a web browsable file or Formatted Text for a space separated file The default format can be changed from the Tools gt Options gt Report options pane Ifyou save the report to the server the default directory will be the Output Path listed in the File Manager If you save the report to the client the default directory is your Windows home directory e g C Documents and Settings lt username gt where lt username gt is your user account To change the location click the Browse button select a directory and type in a filename Note If the file already exists on the server in the chosen path you are trying to save your file to you will be asked whether or not to overwrite it or cancel the save operation 23 To view a report saved on the server open the File Manager and navigate to the directory containing the output file Click on the Refresh button at the top of the File Manager window if necessary Then double click on the report file Click on the X box at the top right corner to close this window Note that the Print function will print on your client machine and the Save function will save to your server machine 24 In the link view of the Network Info window right click and select Demands on thru Link Note that you can also view demands through the link using the View gt Demands on thru Link menu item in the link
174. ge 10 8 Add modify or delete a Service Type Apply a service type to a set of demands in the Modify Demands window Service Profile on page 10 9 Add modify or delete a Service Profiles OR Ss So E Apply a service profile to a node Detailed Procedures 1 To switch to modify mode click on the Modify button in the action mode toolbar The Modify pull down menu gets activated Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 10 1 Creating a Site Sites are user defined groups of nodes In the WANDL software you should define sites if e You wish to perform Site Failure resiliency tests in which the network is tested for survivability in the event that an entire site all the nodes in the site go down For more information please take a look at the section on Failure Simulation Scripts in Chapter 15 Simulation as well as the Simulation chapter within the General Reference Guide e You are performing a design and want to ensure that links that are purchased between certain groups of nodes will be considered free In the WANDL software links between nodes in the same site are considered in house and incur no monthly charge Creating sites will encourage the WANDL software to purchase intra site links because there is little impact on the overall cost of the network design Note that there are other ways in the software to achieve the same effect For more on Design please refer to Chapter 14 Design Note In this section
175. ges e g in most cases it is represented as an arrow in a user input field the cursor symbol is represented as a vertical bar e Click Refers to single clicking pressing and releasing a mouse button Used to select highlight items in a list or to press a button in a window e Double click Refers to two quick clicks of a mouse button e Highlight The reverse video appearance of an item when selected via a mouse click Pop up menu The menu displayed when right clicking in or on a specific area of a window This menu is not a Main Window window menu Drag the cursor down along the menu to the menu option you want to select and release the mouse button to make the selection e Pull down menu The Main Window window menus that are pulled down by clicking and holding down the left mouse button Drag the cursor down the menu to your selection and release the mouse button to make the selection e Radio button An indented or outdented button that darkens when selected An example of a selected radio button follows Ci Figure 1 1 Radio Button e Checkbox A square box inside of which you click to alternately check or uncheck the box a checkmark symbol is displayed inside the box when it 1s checked The checkmark symbol disappears when the box is unchecked An example of a checked checkbox follows Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 1 1 eee The Keyboard The Mouse Figure 1 2 Checkbox e Nav
176. ght 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 7 9 VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION path The Max Path Bw is the least amount of available bandwidth along the links in the path Sample console output is as follows x LAX LOSANGELES BOS BOSTON bw 8 0K new LAX BOS 8 0K R A2Z 02 02 LAX ATL WDC T RWDCBOS Chi DET BOs OSPF Route cost 7354 Max Path Bw 18 06M Delay 22 166ms hop 5 Note For IP networks the routing method e g OSPF ISIS is set through the Tools gt Options gt Design window Path Placement options pane For ATM networks the user may specify different routing methods for different QoS through the Tools gt Options gt Design window Path Placement gt Partition options pane If the Routing Method is set to Constant Distance then the Route Cost will display the number of hops for the path 3 in this example Note that the Routing Method is initialized to the default setting used by the hardware Though you may specify different routing methods for different service classes this may not be supported in the hardware However this flexibility is provided as it allows you to calculate desirable paths to be configured in the network 36 For an ATM network you can additionally specify the Quality of Service by clicking on the Type button and then selecting the desired radio button i e CBR RT NRT etc For ATM if you specify a BW value e g 2M in the demand path opti
177. gical combinations of subviews as described in Viewing Your Network Model By Subview on page 6 19 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 1 10 Saving Different Map Views Save and load different map configurations as described in Map Views on page 6 20 11 Opening Other Maps and Copying Layouts Between Maps Open a second topology window and copy the map layout from one map to another as described in Copy Map Layout on page 6 20 12 Network Element Popup Menus Access right click menus for different network elements as described in Accessing Node Information from the Map on page 6 21 Find nodes and links as described in Finding Network Elements on the Map on page 6 22 13 Print Export and Visio Print or export your topology map as described in Export and Print on page 6 23 or export it to Visio SVG as described in Export to Visio on page 6 25 Using the Legends 6 2 1 When the spec file is created or opened the default topology Standard window is displayed as shown in Figure 6 1 ow Wap Standard Planned Util E g g E P p P F lw Figure 6 1 Map Standard PLANNED UTIL LEGEND Notice in the left pane there is a drop down menu By default the Planned Util legend is displayed and there are multiple legends listed in the drop down menu This legend colors links by planned utilitization By default 0 to 25 planned utilization appears as dark blue 25 to 50 appears as light blue 50 to 75 ap
178. gt Z Add Close Help Figure 8 14 Add Multiple Demands Window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADDING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS 35 Click Add to get a confirmation box notifying the user that 6 demands will be added Click Yes and when the Info dialog box is displayed click OK The console will read Add 6 PVC s 3 intra node demands not added Six new demands were added one demand for every Node A Node Z pair 3 3 9 minus the intra node demands that are ignored NI gt N1 N2 gt N2 N3 gt N3 36 To see the effect of the demand on the network load click on the Update button in the action mode toolbar Click Yes when the dialog box asks whether to update the path placement 37 Look at the following console message Initial 7 PVCs 1 placed 6 unplaced 0 deactivated Iteration 7 PVCs 6 placed 1l unplaced 0 deactivated Average hops 1 00 Max hops 1 0 paths exceed hop limit of 20 3 inks Total Link Cost 24 143 In this case the message indicates that there was insufficient bandwidth to place one of the demands 38 In the Utilization Legends gt Planned Util pane of the Map try moving the color dividers around to distinguish different utilizations of the links on the Map 39 To see how each demand was placed switch to View mode and select Network gt Elements gt Demands Demands Actions IL N mie Details N gdenetailz By AZ BY_ZA T
179. gure 14 11 Update Options 40 Select the final option View Changes or Update selected Links Resize Selected Links Figure 14 12 Updating Selected Links oo x Resize LinkName NodeA NodeZ Vdr Type LinkSpeed UsedBw UtilPct_ SuggestT Suggest _ Saving NewType NewCount J LINK1 ATL HOU DEF OC3 155 520M 240 570M 154 69 AGGR1IG 2406 850 24M a Ci _ LINK18 _ ATL LAX DEF OC3 155 520M 1 443G 927 47 AGGR2G 72 12 1856 3 OC LINKZ ATL WDC DEF OC3 155 520M 1 764G 1134 39 AGGR2G 88 21 1856 A j ILINK3 BOS DET DEF OC3 155 520M 783 790M 503 98 lAGGR1G 78 38 850 24M A mi LINK4 BOS NYC DEF 0c3 155 520M 356 825M 229 44 AGGRIG 35 68 850 24M AGGRI w1 J LINKS _ CHI DAL DEF 0C3 155 520M 1 025G 659 26 AGGR2G 151 26 1856 4 CI LINK6 CHI DEN DEF OC3 155 520M 682 696M 438 98 AGGRIG 68 27 850 24M 3 Ci ILINK CHI DET DEF OC3 155 520M 1 001G 1643 27 JAGGR2G 50 02 185G i LINKS CHI WDC DEF OC3 155 520M 1 2676 814 86 AGGR2G 63 36 1 856 __ CI LINK9 DAL IHOU DEF OC3 155 520M 943 900M 606 93 lAGGR1G 94 39 850 24M j ILINKI0 DEN SFO DEF OC3 155 520M 389 523M 250 46 AGGR1G 38 95 850 24M C UNK11 HOU SDG DEF OC3 155 520M 614 225M 394 95 AGGRIG 61 42 850 24M Filter Eol 18 of 18 displayed 41 This option allows the user to select which links
180. h to display a title or comment specify it under the Titles etc section and make sure the corresponding item is checked in the Show in Output section You may also choose to display the legends and or Date Time Titles etc Title hy Visio output Comment Sample Fish network Show in Output WW Title W Comment W Legends wi Date and Time Figure 6 35 Export to Visio options 104 Click Save to continue The system then displays a dialog box with page and margin sizes Landscape is recommended see Visio Tips for tips on the aspect ratio If you want to print or plot onto large paper sizes such as 60 by 36 inches change the width and height in inches here The Country Map Resolution can be changed to coarsen the map resolution in order to reduce the visio output file size The default resolution is approximately 1 pixel 1 77th of an inch Increasing this number will make the country map coarser by increasing the length of the line segments making up the map x Mode gt Landscape W Portrait Page Width dn 11 0 Height in les Margins Lett 0 25 Right 0 26 Top 0 28 Bottom 0 25 Country Map Resolution fini 0 01 34 _K Figure 6 36 Page Settings Window 105 Click OK to see the message Export completed successfully Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 25 i SETTING UP THE STENCILS FOR VISIO 2002 AND EARLIER ONLY If you saved to the VDX format Visio 2003 skip to the
181. has to start with Router to identify the table as a chassis table Discount and maintenance fees must be typed as integer e g 50 and not 50 The router name is used in the card cost table to find out the commissioning date of all the cards that belong to the same router It needs to be specified in the Device Group column of the card cost table Column header descriptions e Vendor Cisco or Juniper e Device Group Reserved for grouping e Start Date Date when the equipment starts depreciating e Router Name Hostname of the router in the configuration file e Chassis Chassis name e g mx960 as reported in WANDL equipment inventory e List price List price of the equipment e Discount Discount is applied to the list price It must be a value higher than 0 e Depreciation period The monthly depreciation costs are calculated with the following formula List price 1 Discount Depreciation period e Maintenance Maintenance fees are a percentage of the monthly depreciated costs CARD COST TABLE The following table is a sample router cost table in CSV format for Cisco router Ca go po Vendor Device Group StartDate DD MM YYYY Part Name Part Number List Price Discount Depreciation Period Maintenance Cisco LOS 1 17 2010 PRP 2 6000 50 60 10 Cisco LOS 1 1 2010 4GE SFP LC 6000 50 60 10 Cisco L0S 1 172010 GEH GB1IC SC 6000 50 60 10 Note that the first line has to start with Card to identify the tab
182. hat was encountered during the exhaustive failure simulation and which particular failure event triggered it Simulation Overview PeakSimSummary Contains summary information about the failure simulations performed as part of the exhaustive failure simulation including the simulation type node link etc element brought down and the resulting statistics These statistics include the number of demands tunnels impacted number of demands tunnels failed not including demands tunnels terminating at failed nodes maximum and average hop count after failure number of links where bandwidth oversubscription occurred and so on For a detailed explanation of each field view the header of the report Oversubscribed Links PeakSimLink Link oversubscription details occurred during failure simulation are saved in PeakSimLink file A utilization over 100 indicates that the traffic exceeds the link bandwidth Failed Path PeakSimRoute The PeakSimRoute report indicates failed demand information i e demands which failed to be rerouted after they were connected if any Rerouted Path PeakSimReroute If Generate Detailed Reroute Report is selected from the Report Options tab then demand tunnel reroute info is saved in PeakSimReroute file indicating the demand that was disconnected the original path and the rerouted path Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 15 11 SIMULATION 15 For more information see the Reference Guide
183. he Design pull down menu will be activated Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN view A Design Simulation 5 Modify Figure 14 1 Switching to Design Mode The console will include information similar to the following Read parameter file space wandl sample original atm uk dparam uk Read 8 Backbone nodes Read nodeparam file space wandl sample original atm uk nodeparam uk Read bblink file space wandl sample original atm uk bblink uk Read Demand file space wandl sample original atm uk demand uk PVCs read from file space wandl sample original atm uk demand uk 130 Average hops 1 54 Max hops 5 0 paths exceed hop limit of 8 se Traffic load is set according to PVC bandwidth util and framesize value 10 links Total Link Cost 28 275BP Figure 14 2 Network with Node Labels Turned On 2 On the map click on the Types sub legend of the Legends menu The map indicates that the only type of trunk in this network is an El Here El is the trunk type 3 Click on Network gt Elements gt Demands Left click on the BW_AZ column heading once to globally sort the bandwidth from A to Z in descending order Close the window 4 Switch back to the Utilization Legends gt Planned Util legend in the Map window Right click on a heavily utilized link e g N1 N7 and select View gt Links under Pointer from the right click menu Then click on the Capacity tab of the resulting window
184. he bottom right corner to create a rectangle that contains those nodes Simultaneously hold down the lt Shift gt key to constrain the rectangle to be a square A green box will be drawn with little square handles that reflects the area selected by your mouse clicks as shown in Figure 6 18 Figure 6 18 Drag and rotate selection box applied on map The rectangle will remember all the nodes and collapsed groups inside it Exception if some of the nodes groups in the rectangle are selected highlighted in yellow then the rectangle will remember only these This is useful if the selected nodes cover an irregular area on the map and are mixed together with non selected nodes the drag rotate tool will only affect the ones you want Drag one of the eight square handles to stretch or shrink the region Put the mouse inside the green rectangle then drag to move the nodes If you have a mouse wheel rotate it to rotate the points inside the green rectangle If you don t have a mouse wheel click the middle mouse button to rotate them one way and lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift gt click the middle button to rotate the other way The rotation is along ellipses inside the rectangle so if you want true circular rotation make sure the rectangle is a square by using lt Shift gt drag when you create it There are two ways to end the drag rotate operation click outside the green rectangle or click on the Drag Rotate button to turn it off Copyright
185. he path select feature you may want to choose the resulting network paths selected paths using Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Interactive Mode gt Update Preferred Path Setting There are several different link distance calculation methods that you can use to assess how optimal your demand paths are Based on the results you may wish to one or more of the following update the preferred path setting change admin weights and or purchase additional links Refer to Chapter 18 Network Grooming for more details Path Diversity Design Path Diversity Design lets you design paths for diversity Diverse path routing enables you to route two or more demands over site diverse link diverse or facility diverse routes 20 Before running diverse path design you should create diversity groups These groups indicate which paths must be disjoint e For tunnels router module diverse standby secondary paths can be created for existing tunnels from Modify gt Elements gt Tunnels using the Path Config Options Add Div Stdby or Add Div Sec Dynamic Refer to the Router Guide chapter on Diverse Path Design for more details e For optical transport diverse groups are created when adding 1 1 using the Path Config Options or adding a Virtual Concatenation group using the Demand Type Parameter Generation flag VCATD for virtual concatenation diverse Refer to the Transport Guide for more details e Alternatively you
186. he peak rate requirement specified in the demand file by BRbandwidth where bandwidth is in bits per second can be Ignored or Checked during design See the Reference Guide for more details on these options Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 16 3 ne Simulating Path Placement Tuning 2 Select Simulation gt Simulate Path Placement In the Console window type in a number or q to exit This option simulates the placement of demands on the network for a user specified number of iterations Demand routes are dynamic and order dependent By allowing the user to simulate path placement any number of times the user can assess how well the network topology can place the current demands during normal network conditions This option is useful when analyzing very tight networks where the placement and order of demands may affect the calls carried Here is one possible run result displayed in the console if you enter 10 for 10 iterations These results are not as interesting because all iterations return the same results The results may be more interesting in an ATM network Or even better try a similar simulation on your own network model HPr Highest priority of demands not placed BwRat Total bandwidth of demands not placed Total bandwidth LkBw OvSub Number of links violating bandwidth constraints i e links with Used BWF Reserved BW gt Avail BW Max Avg Info on Failed Demands LkBw Ite
187. his feature can be used to read in files such as the backbone demand file the link configuration file the node weight file and the user defined link distance file This option can be used for traffic forecasting It can also be used to change control files for different design runs Note that files specified in the spec file are read in automatically when the spec is opened Files not specified in the spec files may be read in using the File gt Load Network Files option Prerequisites You should be logged onto the WANDL client and have opened a spec file that contains a reference to a valid muxloc file Related Documentation It may be helpful if you first read Chapter 2 What is a Spec File The equivalent function in the text mode of the WANDL software BBDsgn can be found in the Read Files section of Chapter 22 Text Mode Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the import file process 1 Select File gt Load Network Files as described in step 1 on page 5 2 2 Go to the Network Files tab with the file parameter and read in a file as described in step 2 on page 5 2 and step 4 on page 5 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 5 1 eee Detailed Procedures 1 Select Load Network Files from the File pull down menu for the following window General DesighParameters Network Files Lal 24 En Backbone Files bblink blink mpls tish demand emand mpls tish facility acility mpls fi
188. ice profiles to nodes is used in the Traffic Generation tool Please refer to Chapter 20 Advanced Traffic Generation for more details on that feature 10 10 MEN ooo M Service Profile Name None Node Weight lo Max Trunk BWW Block from adding new trunks false Max Transit Demand Bw Figure 10 14 Specifying a Service Profile for a Node Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USER PARAMETERS AND LINK RULES his chapter describes how to use the USer Parameters feature in order to provide greater flexibility in characterizing and working with nodes links sites demands and tunnels in your network In particular it is extremely useful when used in conjunction with the Link Rules feature to determine if there are any existing links that do not follow the established templates When to use Use this feature if you wish to specify custom parameters for your various network elements or wish to perform the validation of links against defined templates Note that the tunnel user parameters require a special license for MPLS tunnels Please contact your Juniper representative for more information Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you should have started up the WANDL software and opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You should know how to add and modify your network as explained in Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands and Chapter 9 M
189. ich demands to route the user can now enter the path index number n for the nth demand listed in the demand file path name the demand ID all or unplaced If a demand ID is entered that demand is displayed Then if a better path is found it is displayed or if no better path is found the program displays the message No Change If the user selects all then the program exhaustively examines every circuit Selecting unplaced results in only the unplaced demands being examined Note If you have complex path names that you want to enter you can open the demand file using the File Manager before entering the Console mode Then while you are in Console mode you can highlight the demandID and press lt Ctrl c gt to copy and then click on the console text box and press lt Ctrl v gt to paste 9 Ifa better path is found you have the option of replacing the current path with the new one Path 36 demands demands N1 N9 19 200 R 9 9 5 5 NIL NS N9FEFE not placed Path demand8 not allocated Candidate 1e 4 5 9 3 9 Replace default no y n q To replace the circuit path type y and press lt RETURN gt If you press n and lt RETURN2 gt the circuit is not replaced If you press q the program will not continue to check other demand paths 10 If the user selected non interactive mode instead in step 7 on page 16 5 the following message is displayed Path Placement Option 1 All Paths 2 Unplaced
190. iew All Di A Z direction Di 2 4 direction D Path through D StartEnd at ACATLI D StartlEnd at ZHON Show all Traffic Load Show all End to End Delay Figure 7 7 Actions for Demands on thru Link You can select a different option to filter the demands to show only demands that pass through the link Pass through demands in the A gt Z direction or demands in the Z gt A direction 26 Note that you can select the Statistics View to summarize the details of the demands currently featured Select any demand to return to the Details View indicating details for the currently highlighted demand 27 Right click a demand and select Show Path to highlight the demand s current path on the map Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 7 7 VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION 100 0 90 0 Figure 7 8 Show Path Path animation is turned on by default If it is not currently on you can go to Tools gt Options gt Map Preferences and check the Animate Paths checkbox You will be able to see the direction of the path by viewing the direction that the line segments are moving in Note If you have an MPLS enabled network a purple highlight may appear along the path to indicate the passage through a tunnel If you look at the Current Route column of a View Demands window you may see tunnel paths in brackets For example ATL WDC T RWDCBOS CHI DET BOS DET indicates a tunnel between Washington DC an
191. igation When you type text into a field use the lt Tab gt key or the mouse to move to the next logical field Click inside a field using the mouse to move directly to that field e Gray or Grayed out A button or menu selection is described as gray or grayed out when it is available in this release of the WANDL software but currently has been inactivated so that the user cannot use it or select it The cursor keys located on the lower two rows of this keypad perform cursor movement functions for the window cursor They are labeled with four directional arrows on the key caps The WANDL software makes use of these keys for cursor movement within files The following keys or key combinations can be used in the WANDL software windows except where noted e Click on a file then hold down the lt Shift gt key while clicking on another file to select the file first clicked on and all files in between e Click on a file and then hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while clicking on another file to select the file first clicked on and the file next clicked on without selecting any of the files in between You can continue to lt Ctrl gt click to select additional single files The PC mouse has two buttons the workstation mouse has three buttons The WANDL software makes use of the left and right mouse buttons on both the PC and the workstation The workstation s middle mouse button 1s not used The following terms describe operations that can be
192. ign Diversity Set Critical Demand Priority 20 Set Essential Demand Priority 20 Link Failure Definition 2 Single Line s All Parallel Lines Between Two Nodes Facility ECMP Hardware Multicast MPLS TE MPLS TE LSP Tunnel Att Reserved Bandwidth Site Diversity Definition Single Site Failure Single Node Failure 9 Site amp Node Failure Failure Simulation Integrity Checks Wap Preferences Report VoIP Diversity Design Use O Preempt Priority Priority La Lens Cas Figure 14 7 Diversity Design Options LINK FAILURE AND SITE DIVERSITY DEFINITIONS In the diversity design options you can specify an interpretation for a link failure In the above figure the Link Failure Definition has been set to Single Line indicating that only one line will be failed at a time Alternatively you can choose to indicate the failing of all lines between two nodes In that case multiple lines may be failed together when a link 1s failed Similarly you can choose an interpretation for a site failure in the Site Diversity Definition It can refer to a single site failure single node failure or both If using Site Failure you should define your sites as explained in Chapter 10 Modifying Sites Owners Etc CRITICAL AND ESSENTIAL DEMANDS By definition the program takes critical demands to be those that must survive any site or link failure and essential demands to be those that must survive
193. ile with three service types all with the same percentage of usage are all entered in as 10 The program will then recalculate and assign them each 1 3 of the usage 33 33 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 10 9 38 The new entry will then appear in the list of service profiles on the top pane of the Service Profile window 39 40 41 42 O Network Info 2 Network Service Profiles Profile Mo of Services Other profiled Admin Weights amp Facilities Fier o o 4 1 of 1 displayed Multicast Group e OSPF Areas A owners i Percentage Routing Instances EA service Profiles T Serice Types Nodes Ho Add Modify Delete Hignignt Figure 10 13 Service Profile To modify any record select and highlight the record in the Service Profiles list and click Modify A Modify Service Profile window will appear allowing the user to change the selected profile To delete any record select and highlight the record and click on the Delete button To apply the new service profile to network nodes open the Nodes window by selecting Modify gt Elements gt Nodes In the Nodes window select one or more nodes in the table to modify and click Modify In the Modify Node window click on the Design Properties tab and in the Service Profile Name drop down box select a service profile you just created When done click OK to submit the change Note Applying serv
194. ill bring up the following menu in the Console window Compare Backbone Menu 1 Original Link File bblink uk 2 New Link File New design 3 Save Link Comparisons 4 View Graphical Differences Select q QUIT Select 1 to select the original link file In this case you can type in bblink greenfield 20 Select 3 to save the comparisons into a text file The following question will be asked Perform vendor and site adjustment default yes y n 66 99 If you select y the comparison performed will not take into account different vendor choices when comparing the two link files It will also ignore the choice of different nodes from the same site If two links are the same except that they start from different nodes of the same site and or end at different nodes of the same site they are treated as rearrangeable and therefore the same If you choose n however these will be treated as differences Choose a name for the resulting file It will contain a record of which links are unique to the original link file and the new link file It will also display which links are shared in both files not including rearrangeable links and which links are rearrangeable A summary is displayed in the console similar to that below 1 links are added in New design but not in bblink greenfield O links are deleted in bblink greenfield but not in New design O links are locally rearranged 9 links are in both files
195. in with largest AW Gain first 12 After you have specified all your desired options for Net Groom click on OK in the Net Groom Fetch Demands window You will then be prompted to choose whether or not you want to Save the source nodes used in filtering to a file Click Yes if you want to do this otherwise click No After this the Net Groom window will appear Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 18 3 CRITIAS ALUR RIVENDELL S TELLYIA TIMAEUS S TELLYIA ZAMARKEN ZANAREEM GARNET GARNET AC MILA ACMILAN ATLAS LILLIPLIT LILLIPLIT PLATO Mode lt CARPEDIEM FRIGIDARI MULARIIA MULARIIA ARSENAL AC MILAN TEPIDARILIM MULARIIA MULARIIA MULARIIA TEPIDAR IL ht TEFIDAR ILI M MULARIIA TEFIDAR ILI M MULARNIIA STELLYIA TEPIDARILIM MULARIIA MULARIIA By 429 190K 2 169 439 940 103 940K 926 60K 2 97 9M 214 470 190 960K 594 010K 616 400K 224 1740K 64 7 60K 176 460K 61 0 900K 1 600 M 1 043M 53 610 147 450K 526 960K Ne Orig Avi s00 600 500 600 00 500 500 600 400 400 00 500 400 600 00 500 400 300 00 _ BestA best Av Ga 200 300 300 400 300 300 300 400 200 200 300 300 200 400 300 300 200 100 300 300 jagg 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Orig Path Bl 7 M25 IN2 NS M M3 M4 M M1 3 1 0 INS N1 4 Best Path N17 N1B N2 N1 4 E M3 M4 M N13 N1
196. ing Nodes and Links in the Legends on page 6 5 Labels Label nodes and links in your network model display the link distance delay metrics and hide the pricing message as described in Network Element Labels on page 6 6 Geographical Map Display your model network superimposed against a geographical map as described in Displaying Geographical Maps on page 6 8 Map Preferences Set your client map preferences including color settings font size and whether or not to draw links with curvature as described on Map Preferences on page 6 8 Layout Reset layout according to city lat lon data city data can be specified through modify mode or arrange selected nodes in an easily readable format using Circle Nodes or Distribute Selected Points as described in Topology Layout on page 6 10 Select and Rearrange Select and rearrange nodes and links by hand as described in Node and Link Selection and Node Rearrangement on page 6 11 or use the drag rotate tool as described inUsing the Drag Rotate Tool on page 6 14 Save the graphical coordinates as described in step 48 on page 6 13 Using the Navigator and Zoom Functions Use the navigator window and zoom in and out as described in Zooming In and Out and Using the Navigator Window on page 6 16 Grouping Use the grouping functions as described in Grouping Functions on page 6 18 Protocol Subviews Choose a subview for example OSPF Use the amp or and functions to view different lo
197. is the same as was described in the previous section Steps to Take After Tuning or Designing from Scratch PREFERRED REQUIRED PATH SETTING This option is for designing paths for hardware with the path select or path required feature If a path is not required other routes may be used Note in text mode that PR is used in the demand tunnel file Type_field to indicate a required path and PS is used in the demand tunnel file Type field to indicate a preferred path 13 After tuning or designing from scratch you can choose to set the current paths to be preferred or required paths From the Path Placement menu in the console accessible from Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Interactive Mode in the Java client select 6 Update Preferred Path Setting Preferred Path Modification Menu 1 Demand with Preferred Path setting 0 2 Demand with Required Path setting 0 3 Use current routes as preferred reguired paths Select 14 Note that the menu provides information about the number of demands or tunnels if your setting is for router hardware layer 2 If there are no preferred or required paths select 3 to make your paths required If you have no secondary or standby paths you will get the following options Set current paths to 1 Preferred paths 2 Required Paths 3 No action Select Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 16 7 ne 16 8 Note that if you have standby or secondary paths the menu you will
198. isplayed under the Tunnel Layer Network Reports folder e Simulation Reports Includes results of failure simulations Note that some reports will not be activated until the appropriate failure simulation is run For more information refer to Chapter 15 Simulation For router networks Tunnel Layer reports will be displayed under the Tunnel Layer Simulation Reports folder e Configuration Reports For router networks the configuration reports include reports generated when importing in the router configurations and or SNMP bridge files For more information on the integrity checks report see the Router Guide Integrity Check Report chapter Additionally SNMP ISIS OSPF and additional status reports are generated e Customized Reports Customized reports contain reports that are customized by the user to contain the columns of interest Right click the Customized Reports folder and select Add a New Report to open the wizard in which you can specify which information related to Node Link Interface Demand Tunnel VPN or VLAN to include in the customized report 4 Click on the plus sign to the left of Network Reports to view network related reports Further click on the plus sign to the left of the Demand Reports folder icon to view the demand related reports Open the Demand Path amp Diversity Report to see the actual path of demands in the network and the resulting delay number of hops mileage etc for the demand The currentpag
199. item use either lt Ctrl gt click or lt Shift gt click Display Option Select the column s to be displayed Select From nee o ce Figure 21 15 linkconf Display Option Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 21 9 Oe 21 Next click on the Add button to move these items to the right side of the window 22 To remove entries highlight those items on the Selected Item s list and click Remove 23 To move the items around in a different order select the item you wish to move then click either Move Up or Move Down 24 When you are satisfied with the selected items on the list to be displayed click Ok Command Line Utility wcompare sh 21 10 A file comparison utility can be accessed from the command line text mode after it has first been created for a network in the graphical user interface The command line utility wcompare sh is located in the bin folder of WANDL HOME by default u wandl 25 Execute wcompare sh by the following command S cd u wandl bin S wcompare sh 26 You will get an interactive session to specify the directory of both networks and the file type to compare In the following example the user input is in bold format Please enter the directory of the first network default space wandl sample original router wandl Please select the runcode of the first network 1 wandl 1 Please enter the directory of the second network space wandl sample original router d
200. k by fulfilling the current network traffic requirements in as inexpensive a manner as possible 10 Select Design gt Backbone gt Reset Clear Links The Reset Clear Links option clears all links except links defined in the network s fixlink file specified in the spec file If the fixlink file is not specified Reset Clear Links will remove all trunks from the current topology This option furthermore adds back links in the fixlink file 1f they are missing Note It is safe to remove all links during design Your original bblink file will not be overwritten unless you explicitly save the network environment over your existing network files You can also load your original bblink file back into the network at any time using File gt Load Network Files clicking on the bblink button and reselecting the original bblink uk file 11 Click Yes to remove all links this network contains no fixlink file and Yes to adjust path placement for all demands The console indicates that the total link cost is now 0 12 Select Design gt Backbone gt Perform Design Click Yes to remove potentially redundant links The resulting messages in the Console should look similar to the following Initial 130 PVCs 0 placed 130 unplaced 0 deactivated 0 Els Total Link Cost OBP Average Cost Mile 18 96BP Assigned Cost Hop 1137 36BP 9 Els Total Link Cost 24 926BEP 9 Els Total Link Cost 24 926BP 9
201. l network state All links nodes and facilities are brought back up and demands are routed according to the state at which the simulation mode was entered Interactive Node Failure 13 Try failing node ATL and node BOS and then running a simulation Select the Node tab from Simulation gt Interactive Scenarios You can select the nodes to fail from the list or right click the nodes on the map and select Fail Node from the popup menu Note Once the Interactive Scenaios window is open do not press the Close button until your simulation has completed Pressing the Close button will cause the failed elements to be brought back up The console reports that two nodes are brought down Node ATL ATLANTA Brought Down Node BOS BOSTON Brought Down When you click on the Run button you see simulation options again in the Console messages followed by a listing of disconnected demands and how they are handled followed by a summary section In this case 92 demands are disconnected According to the summary messages shown below there are 42 demands passing through failed nodes Of these demands no demands failed to be rerouted All 50 demands terminating at failed nodes failed to be rerouted as expected SUMMARY Max Avg Ilnfo on Failed Demands LkBw Hop Hop Count Bandwidth BwRat HPr OvSub prev T 230 0 0 0 0 current 1 O20 50 Z21SekSOM 22 06 2 Demands terminating at failed nodes 50 bw 278 156M Demand passing thro
202. lation gt 3 Failure Analysis gt 5 Facility Failure Press Enter and then select a failure report option 2 Create one link utilization report per simulation This would create one LKUTIL lt facility_name gt lt runcode gt report for each facility Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 15 13 SIMULATION 15 Viewing Simulation Results Graphically EXHAUSTIVE FAILURE SIMULATION 54 After running a scripted simulation with the Generate Peak Utilization option selected you can view the peak utilizations for each link from the Standard map from Utilization Legends gt Peak Util Ga Map Standard is Peak Util 18 link cost 2811428 100 0 90 0 75 0 0 0 Figure 15 14 Peak Utilizations INTERACTIVE FAILURE SIMULATION 55 While running an interactive failure simulation you can save screenshots to view the rerouting or failure of each demand as a result of selected node link or facility failures To do so select Tools gt Options gt Simulation and set Verbose Mode to yes on the Failure Simulation gt Failure Report options pane and select Take automatic screenshot during simulations fromthe Failure Simulation gt Auto Screenshot options pane You can also decide whether or not to include the legend in the screenshot Then run your interactive failure simulation 56 Next go to the client directory that was specified in the Failure Simulation gt Auto Screenshot options pane to view the scre
203. le as a card table Discount and maintenance fees must be typed as integer e g 50 and not 50 The card table must include either the part name or the part number to perform cost calculation Column header descriptions e Vendor Cisco or Juniper e Device Group Name of a router where the card is installed This is used to assign the starting date of the depreciation e Start Date Date when the equipment starts depreciating This field is used if no device group is specified e Part name Name of the card from the show command e Part number Part number of the line card e List price List price of the equipment e Discount Discount is applied to the list price It must be a value higher than 0 e Depreciation period The monthly depreciation costs are calculated with the following formula List price 1 Discount Depreciation period e Maintenance Maintenance fees are a of the monthly depreciated costs Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 13 3 Ne LINK COST TABLE The link cost table is used to input the costs of the links from the IP flow demand routing path It should include all the IP links connecting two neighboring routers In practice this cost table may only include the inter site links as they are the most expensive There are some special links in the backbone aggregated links that are a bundle of multiple physical links e g links with a Port Channel or an interface Physical links that are part of the
204. lements gt Links option is automatically displayed from the pull down menu in the left pane of the topology window Type in LINK 1 as shown in Figure 6 30 91 Try clicking Find Next and Find Prev to move forward and backward in the list among the links containing the substring LINK1 Then click Close to close the Find Links window prn 18 link cost 2611426 Find Case sensitive _ FindNex Next _ FindPrev Prey iia ai _ Close Figure 6 30 Find Links Containing LINK1 92 For more detailed filters use the filter buttons in the search bar of the Network gt Elements gt Nodes and Network gt Elements gt Links windows and then click Highlight All to highlight them on the map 6 22 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Export and Print From the right click menu in the topology view there are options for Print and Export PRINT 93 Select the Print option to print the topology in view A dialog box will ask you whether to print the whole topology window or the map only Select Whole map window to save the whole topology window including title bar legend and toolbar Select Map only to save only the map portion of the topology window 94 The following Page Setup dialog can be used to change the default orientation paper size source and margins Note that the maps are often best printed in Landscape orient
205. line between two columns or two rows until the cursor becomes a double arrow Then press down the left mouse button key and drag to the left or right or top or bottom for row to resize the column To sort a column click on the column header If it is in descending order and you want ascending order or vice versa click on the column header again To limit the columns in view right click over the report on the left pane of the Report Manager and select Select Columns or click on the button Select Columns above the table Columns in the Unselected Column s list can be moved to the Selected Column s list using the Add gt button Undesired columns can be removed by selecting them from the Selected Column s list and selecting the lt Remove button Fa Column Selection Lnselected Column si Selected Columns LinkMame From To en EE a Typ p n Default IGP_Partitian IGP_ Flow IGP_FlowByy Figure 19 3 Select Required Columns Window To reorder the columns select one or more columns from the Selected Column s list and click the up or down arrows to change the position of the highlighted column s Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Saving Reports 12 13 14 15 16 REPORT MANAGER To save a report on your client machine go back to the Report Manager right click over the report on the left pane and select Save Whole Report to Client to save the entire rep
206. lowing window Wode Gink SRLG Faciliy interface Options Fail Facility Name Links wi FACILIT 1 5 Figure 15 6 Fail Facility Window 18 Check the Fail checkbox next to the line containing FACILITY15 The console message indicates that LINK15A and LINK15B are brought down Facility FACILITYIS is brought down LINKISA PHI WDC ATT 1 OC3 OSPF AREA AREAO Down LINK15B PHI WDC ATT 1 OC3 OSPF AREA AREAO Down Now you can click on the Run button on the main menu bar to run the failure simulation 58 more demands are disconnected The summary is as follows SUMMARY Max Avg Info on Failed Demands LkBw Hop Hop Count Bandwidth BwRat HPr OvSub prev 7 2 9 0 0 0 05 O oO current Due 0 0 0 06 0 4 All demand s placed 19 Select the Reset Simulation button Stepping Through a Simulation 20 For a more detailed failure simulation analysis rerun the simulation this time selecting Verbose Mode in the Options tab and using Step instead of Run Select the links to fail and then click Step Stepping will allow the user to see how each disconnected demand is rerouted one by one 21 For each disconnected demand there are two lines in the console One is a line indicating the original path and ending with DISCONNECTED Following that is another line for the demand either indicating a new path followed by REROUTED or the old path followed by FAILED if that demand was not able to be routed The foll
207. m simulation and from Report menus This report directory can be changed when the network 1s closed by specifying reportdir xxx in dparam file Close Network Project File 8 If you want to close a spec file you should be in View or Design mode If you happen to be in the Modify action mode you should first switch out of that mode To do so select the View mode button from the toolbar containing the four action modes L Design Simulation D Modify Figure 3 3 Selecting View Mode Before Closing a Network 9 Afterwards you can select File gt Close to close the spec file Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 3 3 OPENING AND CLOSING A NETWORK PROJECT Confirm Close E x vf Close current network ves mo Figure 3 4 Close Current Network prompt 10 Click Yes to close the network or No to cancel Note If modifications were made you may be asked whether or not you want to save the changes In that case a dialog box will be displayed Specify the directory to save your files in and the runcode to use for the files You can save the files under the same name in the same directory overwriting previous files unless the files or the folder is read only Alternatively you can save the files under a different name or in a different location Warning You will not be prompted to save changes if you only rearranged node positions or graphical coordinates on the Map
208. me stamp To change to another directory enter the command cd lt directory gt 13 Press lt Ctrl gt d ctrl key and d at the same time or type exit to exit the UNIX shell Note The screen editor e g vi should not be executed while in graphics mode 14 Note that the options are slightly different for the demand file Two demand files may be read in a demand file and newdemand file The newdemand file is used only if the user has additional demands This feature is intended to simplify the input process since the program automatically merges the demands from both files if more than one file is supplied Current demand file 3418 demands demand x Current newdemand file none Replace Current Demand Reguirements default no y n y Demand File Name Modification Menu 1 demand file demand x 2 newdemand file none Select q QUIT UNIX 1 Enter Name of demand file or none default demand x demand x2 Demand File Name Modification Menu 1 demand file demand x2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 22 3 TEXT MODE 22 Save Files 2 newdemand file none Select q QUIT UNIX From the Main Menu Option 2 is used to save the network files among which include the demand path assignment link configuration user defined link distance information design parameter information The complete design environment can also be saved to a directory using this option 15 To access this optio
209. ments gt Links in View mode There you may fetch the specific link you wish to view or all links to view their distance under the metric field Provisioned Util 18 link cost 2811428 ES Figure 10 9 Link Distances Displayed on Topology Map Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 10 7 Service Type Service type is a way of describing traffic types for demands When creating or modifying demands the service type can automatically fill in the fields for the specified service type of the new demand Note that this feature is slightly more general than the demand template accessed from Modify gt Elements gt Element Templates gt Demand It also allows for capabilities that were not allowed in the demand template since it is not only a template but also a demand field For example you can search for demands by the service type field and you can add single demands with a service type Currently only the Modify gt Elements gt Demands Add gt Multiple Demands option supports creating demands using the demand template accessed from Modify gt Template gt Demand 26 Switch to Modify mode on your network The Modify drop down menu should be activated 27 Select Modify gt More gt Service Type 28 A Service Type window will appear that will list any existing service types Network Info A950 0 ere 0 0 0 05 0 0 0 0 oro 0 0 00 2 9 054 09 00 00 0 0 2 9 0 0 2 o e 4 229 ora a pro 4 0
210. meters will be indicated as User lt parameter_name gt where lt parameter _name gt is the chosen identifier for the parameter 15 Insert the items for the query and click OK to perform the filter For more information on Text Filtering refer to the General Reference Guide Text Filter Nodes Enter a query Keys Relations rCurrent Values cn meet mst Search Preference i Exact Match Match Substring Wildcards and iO Regular Expressions om ose ne Figure 11 6 Nodes Text Filter Window Map Labels with User Parameters 16 User Parameters can also be labelled on the map from the map s right click Label menus using the Customize option e g from Labels gt Node Labels gt Customize or Labels gt Link Labels gt Link Labels gt Customize The User Parameter keys are listed together in one group User at the top of the list of keys 11 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USER PARAMETERS AND LINK RULES usrparam format User Parameters are saved in the usrparam file An example usrparam file is as follows Node city state NODE CHIL eit y Chi cago state 111n061s NODE DEN city Denver state Colorado LINK description LINK LINK4 description my description TUNNEL mylabel TUNNEL ATL RATLCHI mylabel test In the example above there are two Node parameters city and state The subsequent 2 lin
211. mize Table Columns Click Close to close the Nodes window Now select Modify gt Elements gt Links to open the Links view with all the network links In the links table select LINK N1 TO N2 and then lt Shift gt click LINK N3 TO N1 to select both entries Click the Modify button to change these two entries In the Modify Link window select the trunk type T2 to change these links from T1 to T2 Click OK Note The T2 trunk type s bandwidth can be determined from Tools gt Options gt General Path Placement gt Hardware options pane The following dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 9 5 Note Alternatively the user may also highlight the two links on the map and select the Filter From Map button dg The two links will automatically be displayed on the Links window 14 15 moai x 2 Modify Link LINK_N1_TO_N2 Yes to an No Cancel Figure 9 5 Modify confirmation window Click on Yes to All to modify both links Verify the changes in the Links window and click Close If you now select Modify gt Update Network State or click the Update button in the toolbar you will see that the link colors may turn different colors to indicate that a smaller percentage of the total bandwidth is being used Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 9 3 Modifying Demands 16 Now select Modify gt Elements gt Demands from the Modify pull down
212. mple gt cp r fish export home john myexamples fish 5 Now return to your client application and navigate within the File Manager to the newly created folder Right click on the spec mpls fish file and select Spec File gt Modify Spec from the popup menu 6 Within the Spec File Generation window click on the Design Parameters tab Within this tab press the Reset button Click Yes to any popup dialog windows that appear at this time Notice that the Hardware Type dropdown box is now enabled Select a type from this dropdown box General Design Parameters Network Files Design Parameters File dparamuk Browse Reset Hardware Type ROUTER Maximum Number of Modes default 100 Maximum Number of Links default 14500 Figure 1 2 Specifying Your Own Hardware Type Figure I 2 lists the hardware types for a particular user What is displayed in this list will vary depending on the hardware types present in your password license Most users will probably have only one or two types listed 7 Press the Done button The following Specfile Status window will appear Specfile Status Field Filename Status spectile spec uk Overwrite Existing runcode uk datadir ratedir iufwandldbiratesidefautt muxIQc muxloc uk nodeparam nodeparam uk graphcoord graphcoord uk demand dernand uk bblink bblink uk dparam dparam uk Overwrite Existing maxnode default 100 Minimum
213. n go to the main menu and select 2 Save Files by typing 2 at the main menu and then pressing lt Return gt The bbdsgn program prompts the user with the following menu Save Files Menu 1 Path and Link 2 User Link Distance 3 Parameters 4 All Select Demand information link information link distance information and parameter information can be saved by selecting the corresponding menu item 16 Enter the filename to which the information is to be saved or simply press lt Return gt to not save it Sample responses are given below Notice that it is possible to selectively save the information in this example the link distance information is not saved Select 1 Demands were read in from two demand files 679 demands from demand file demand x 1709 demands from newdemand file newdemand x Enter file name for demands demand new gt gt Demand s saved to demand new Enter file name for newdemands newdemand new gt gt Newdemands are saved to newdemand new Save Link Configuration to File bblink new Replace DEF vendor by the vendor name selected default no y n gt gt Link Configuration saved to file bblink new The example also shows that when two demand files are read in they are also saved in separate files Note that after entering 1 the top three lines plus the lines involving the newdemand file will not be displayed if there is no newdemand file 17 To save the design parameters select o
214. n create your own network model by creating a nodes text file muxloc and links text file bblink Or for a router module you can import configuration files into your network as discussed in the Router Guide and the corresponding WANDL network files will automatically be generated Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you must have created a spec file as described in Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model or opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You can then continue with these procedures to modify a spec file You also should have an overview of the WANDL software functionality Related Documentation For an overview of the WANDL software or for a detailed description of each feature and the use of each window refer to the General Reference Guide Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the spec file creation process and the associated recommended procedures 1 Create the spec file to be updated as described in step 1 on page 8 1 2 Switch to modify mode as described in step 2 on page 8 1 3 Add three nodes as described in step 3 on page 8 2 4 View the node labels as described in step 12 on page 8 4 5 Add three links to form a triangle shaped network as described in step 15 on page 8 4 6 Add a single demand and then update the network state as described in step 25 on page 8 6 7 Add multiple demands by specifying source and d
215. n of the file formats Definition When to Use Green field design Design from scratch Input contains no links Incremental design You have some links but want to 1 buy more trunks and to know the optimal place for them to meet new traffic requirements or 2 identify extra capacity to delete Basic design Design that satisfies demands and or other user requirements at minimal cost Diversity design Design that satisfies demands under all single node and single link failures and or other user requirements at minimal cost Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the options available in network design Perform a green field basic design as described in Green field Design on page 14 5 Perform an incremental design as described in Incremental Design on page 14 7 Compare old and new designs as described in Compare Link Files on page 14 8 Perform a diversity design as described in Diversity Design on page 14 10 Check to see if you can remove bandwidth while satisfying diversity as described in step 28 on page 14 13 Perform a resize as described in Resize on page 14 13 ee eS Se p Learn about influencing the design using control files as described in Influencing the Design on page 14 15 Detailed Procedures 1 Open spec uk inthe atm uk folder of the WANDL samples directory You should be in View mode by default Click on the Design button underneath the File menus to select the Design mode T
216. n performing least cost network designs Use these procedures to understand how pricing works and to price links Prerequisites You should have started up the WANDL software and opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project Related Documentation You may also want to refer to the General Reference Guide s chapter on the Network menu Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the process of viewing network information and the associated recommended detailed procedures For some of the example below this tutorial uses the sample network specification file u wandl sample original router wandl spec wandl If you do not have permission to use this example you may edit the hardware vendor listed in the dparam file as hwvendor ROUTER to a hardware that you do have To do this double click on the dparam file in the File Manager and find and edit this line Note that this may affect the routing and therefore the results you get may be different than that obtained for the router hardware 1 View the current price of the network links 2 Create a new custrate file through the JAVA interface 3 Learn the order of precedence between the cost files and how to specify pricing through the usercost usercountrycost and bblink files Detailed Procedures 1 On the map window you should see a price in the upper right corner of the map after opening the network This numbe
217. ncheck the box 31 Alternatively if you are using a PC client you can to save console text by selecting the text with your mouse or using lt Ctrl gt a to select all text in the Console window and then pressing lt Ctrl gt c to copy the text Then you can use lt Ctrl gt v to paste to another window on your PC 7 8 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION Performing a Path Analysis A path analysis can be performed in any of the View Design or Simulation modes Note that the Console detail may vary based on what mode you are in In some cases more detail will be given in the simulation mode 32 To perform a path analysis and check if there is enough bandwidth to route a circuit between a given pair of nodes select Network gt Path amp Capacity gt Path The Demand Path window will be displayed as shown in Figure 7 9 Demand Path Modea Node z BOS v IF addressa w IF adaressz w IPv6 Address IPvb Address Z TW MAC Address A sd J MAC Address Z TW ma e a Owner Any A By Type IR Pri Pre Path Config Options v Highlight Modes Highlight All Show Path Close Hem Figure 7 9 Demand Path Window Options may vary 33 Select a source and destination node from the drop down selection boxes fields Node A and Node B You can also select these nodes from the map by clicking on them Specify any other parameters you w
218. nds ayes Mo Failure Report Integrity Checks Include AS ModefLink O Yes No Map Preferences Report WolP DEEA Figure 15 3 Failure Simulation Options Options may vary Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 15 3 SIMULATION 15 Interactive Simulation Interactive Simulation allows the user to indicate the specific nodes links and or SRLG s facilities that are to be failed during a simulation run During the simulation all the demands that are disconnected due to the specified failures are rerouted one at a time according to the path placement options that are specified in the Failure Simulation Options Interactive Link Failure 6 Select Simulation gt Interactive Scenarios and then select the Link tab to open the Fail Link window Each row contains information for a link and a checkbox under the Fail column This simulation option allows the user to select links to be failed in the network A list of all links is displayed To fail a link simply select an active link by clicking the checkbox preceding the link name To bring a link back up deselect the checkbox The Reset All button will globally bring all failed links back up Interactive Scenarios fi nee LINKI ATL HOw OCS LINKS BOS LINK18 ATL LINK ATL LINK BOS DET OCS LAA OOS WDC OCS Mi 0 14665 Marne Mod Mode Type itil Ae LMI 2 2 0 032256
219. ngCode and click OK 8 To rename a User Parameter select it from the table and click Modify 9 The order of the User Parameters can also be rearranged by using the Up and Down arrows Modifying User Parameter Values 10 In Modify mode select Modify gt Elements gt Nodes and cick the User Parameters tab The User Parameters will be displayed as shown in Figure 11 5 Value 15 range on conet men Figure 11 5 Nodes Window User Parameters Tab Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 11 3 ees 11 Select a cell under the Value column and type in the corresponding value for the given node Click OK when done 12 Similarly this can also be done for the Links Sites Demands and Tunnels windows 13 When modifying more than one element at a time a dialog box will provide the option to append or overwrite onto any existing value For example if an item s previous value were red and you modify multiple items including this item with the value yellow the append option will result in the value red yellow for this item Performing Text Filter on User Parameters One useful feature of the User Parameters feature is the ability to use them as custom keys when performing text filtering on Nodes Links Demands or Tunnels 14 Select Network gt Elements gt Nodes and click the Text Filter button da A window will appear as shown in Figure 11 6 Notice the user para
220. niper net cgi bin docbugreport e E mail Send your comments to techpubs comments juniper net Include the document or topic name URL or page number and software version if applicable Requesting Technical Support Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC If you are a customer with an active J Care or JNASC support contract or are covered under warranty and need post sales technical support you can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC e JTAC policies For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies review the JTAC User Guide located at http www juniper net us en local pdf resource guides 7100059 en pdf e Product warranties For product warranty information visit http www juniper net support warranty e JTAC hours of operation The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 365 days a year Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Documentation and Release Notes iii About the Documentation Self Help Online Tools and Resources For quick and easy problem resolution Juniper Networks has designed an online self service portal called the Customer Support Center CSC that provides you with the following features Opening a Case with JTAC iv Requesting Technical Support Find CSC offerings http www juniper net customers support Search for known bugs http wwwz2 juniper net k
221. nk metrics Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 17 1 Be flows Mame Modes IDO Hodes 1D Metric AZ Metric ZA OSPF AZ OSPF AA 15151 LINKA ae a ona sae nue LINK18 LAK 0ca 80008000 7 LINK ATL ___WD _O 3_ gg3_fgg3_ _ _ _ FINKE CHI DEN Ts LINK CHI DET Metric 22 1600 ARE CHI foc Metric Z A eo sd Changed Routes Name Node Node Z New Path Orig Path N ew Path Cost 9 rig Path Cast New Hops o rig Hops 5 JATLANTA DETROIT ATL HOU DAL CHI DET ATL WDC CHI DET BOS DET 3765 Modify Link Metrics Routing Method OSPF E Modify Metrics Next Cancel Hem Figure 17 2 Modify Link Metrics Right click the table column header and select Table Options In the subsequent window you can add the column Util AZ Util ZA or Peak Util AZ Peak Util ZA Before clicking Next make any modifications to your link metrics that you want to try To do so select the row s you want to modify to a particular metric by lt Ctrl gt clicking to add to the selection or lt Shift gt clicking to select a range of rows Then click Modify Metrics and enter in the new metric for those rows You can do this repeatedly until you have modified all the metrics you want to modify Note that this will modify the metric for the protocol listed in the relevant options window Tools gt Options gt Design Path Placement pane Routing Method field ATM networks may hav
222. ns the spec file From the popup menu select New gt Backbone Data gt bblink Enter in a file name using your spec file s runcode extension e g bblink ex1 This will provide a template for a link Further options can be found in the File Format Guide Add an entry for one link e g LINKI ATL BOS DEF 1 OC3 This specifies to create 1 OC3 link named LINK 1 connecting nodes ATL and BOS with default vendor 34 Right click on spec ex1 and select Edit from the popup menu This will open the spec file within the text editor 35 Insert the following line after the muxloc entry and press the Save button to overwrite the existing file bblink bblink exl Since the datadir is this will specify that the bblink file to be used will be first searched for in the spec directory i e the same folder containing the spec file To specify a file from another directory specify the absolute path Note For more on spec file keywords please refer to the File Format Guide 36 Click Save and close the window from the X button in the upper right hand corner To load the network double click the spec file Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc LOADING A NETWORK FILE not permanently a part of your spec file unless you choose to save your design environment using T his chapter describes how to read or load in a network file into your network model A file that is read in is File gt Save Network When to use T
223. ocols Select the two protocols you want to view together such as MPLS and OSPF and the union of the nodes supporting those will be displayed Using amp instead of or shows the intersection 74 To hide nodes that are not connected to any other nodes in the network in every subview you can select Filters gt Advanced from the map drop down and then check the checkbox next to Hide Isolated Points There are no such nodes in our tutorial model network so no nodes will be hidden as a result of checking that checkbox Note that there is also a Hide Isolated Points in Subview checkbox This option hides nodes that appear disconnected from other nodes in the current subview The former option would not hide these nodes if they are actually connected in the default subview Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 19 ee nn Map Views 75 Multiple map views can be saved for a network including grouping graphical coordinate information and zoom filter legend settings 76 Right click on the map and select Map Views After making the desired changes to the map view select Save Map and provide a name and description for the map view 77 Load a previously saved map view by selecting it from the list and clicking the Load Map button Topology Map Settings lt Type Mame Description Creator Private View Zoom to West Coast warid 04 2391 3 15 11 Private View Rearranged nodes warid 04 2311 3 15 11 Private
224. ode modification you may wish to click Yes to All Note that for single node modification if you attempt to change the node s ID to an ID already existing for this network you may get an error dialog box If this happens change the ID again and then press OK again 8 Verify the changes you just made in the Nodes window You can do this either by clicking on each node and viewing the changes in the bottom tabs Alternatively you can adjust the table columns to display the 9 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Modifying Links 10 11 12 13 MODIFYING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS Comment property that you just edited To do this right click on one of the table column headers and choose Table Options from the right click menu In the Table Options window select Comment from the Available Items list and press Add gt to move it to the Selected Items Then click OK Now take a look at the Nodes window once again Table Options x Icon and Scrollbar z Use image icons or checkbox if applicable Align Lett W AutoFitto Window ig D Align Right Center Select the columnis to be displayed in the table Table Options tee Available temis Selected Item s Mum Wonparallel_ Links ID Parent_Group Mame Service_Profile_Name Hardware Lata z Remove MPA MCE IP_Address Comment Lo ous ass Figure 9 4 Using Table Options to Custo
225. odifying Nodes Links and Demands In order to use the Link Rules feature you should know how to add link templates as explained in the Link Templates chapter of the General Reference Guide Related Documentation For an overview of the WANDL software or for a detailed description of each feature and the use of each window refer to the General Reference Guide Outline Viewing User Parameters on page 11 2 Adding Modifying User Parameters on page 11 3 Modifying User Parameter Values on page 11 3 Performing Text Filter on User Parameters on page 11 4 Link Rules on page 11 6 Adding Modifying Link Rules on page 11 7 Viewing Link Rules Integrity Check Report on page 11 10 2 we Se User Parameters The User Parameters feature allows you to define up to five custom parameters for each type of network element nodes links sites demands tunnels Values can be assigned to these parameters for each individual network element These defined parameters and values can then be used for several different purposes which will be discussed below Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 11 1 D Viewing User Parameters 1 2 To view the existing user parameters first switch to View mode if you are not already in it Select Network gt Elements gt User Parameters The User Parameters window will appear as shown in Figure 11 1 Fl User Parameters Node User Parameters parameter arameter2 parameters Figure 11 1
226. of the demand s current path on the network If this option is not checked the program will search for an optimal path for the demand in the network as if the demand s current path is still affecting the network To be conservative we will uncheck this option 9 The Set Routing Method button activates the console and allows the user to specify which variables to use when optimizing demand placement istance calculation method is set to CBR Adm Weight RT Adm Weight NET Adm Weight UBR ARR Adm Weight odify Design Mode Routing Methods CBR Adm Weight RT Adm Weight NET Adm Weight 4 UBR ABR Adm Weight Select q QUIT Input Figure 18 3 Selecting Service Classes in Console Window 10 CBR RT NRT and UBR ABR are service classes If one of these are selected a second menu will appear allowing the user to select which method to use in calculating link distance CBR Link Distance Calculation Methods l Constant distance 2 Actual mileage 3 Admin weight 5 Delay metric 6 CDY metric Select Input Figure 18 4 Setting Routing Method in Console Window 11 The Sort demands in report by field specifies how demands in the optimized links report will be sorted when a report is generated in the Net Groom window see section Optimizing Demands If Reroute Order is selected the demands will be sorted in the order in which they were rerouted If AW Gain is selected the demands will be sorted by AW Ga
227. og Please select the runcode of the second network 1 dog 1 Please select the file s to be compared separated by commas 0 all 1 muxloc 2 bblink 3 linkconf 4 tunnel 5 intfmap 6 nodeparam 7 demand 8 dparam 9 hpnni 2 Please enter the output file default stdout Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc TEXT MODE his chapter briefly covers the use of the text mode command line version of the WANDL software called bbdsgn short for backbone design When to use Use to run batch processes or operations where the graphical interface creates too much overhead in disk space or time Text mode can also be used to automate certain processes Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you should have a working understanding of Unix You should also have a spec file containing the specification of your network files as explained in Chapter 2 What is a Spec File Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline explaining how to use the text mode Running bbdsgn on page 22 1 Navigation in the menu on page 22 2 Read Files on page 22 2 Save Files on page 22 4 r rF SS p Saving Keystrokes for Batch Mode on page 22 5 Detailed Procedures Running bbdsgn 1 To execute the bbdsgn program first go to the u wandl bin directory using the following command S cd u wandl bin 2 Then enter the following at the command line prompt under the u wandl bin directory to start bbdsgn S bbdsgn
228. om 4 In the top left of the Net Groom Fetch Demands window you can select the source nodes of the demands you want to optimize The default setting is all nodes Alternatively source nodes for demands can be read in from a file Click the Read From File button and select the file from the server The format of the file is simply the id of each node on a separate line In this example we want to optimize all demands so we will use the default values In the top right of the Net Groom Fetch Demands window you can select which demands you want to optimize based an three selection criteria Demand Type Max BW and Max Priority If Demand Type is specified only those demands that fit the demand type specified will become candidates for optimization If Max BW is specified only those demands with bandwidths that are less than Max BW will be chosen for optimization If Max Priority is specified only those demands that are of lower priority than Max Priority will be selected for optimization If none of these fields are specified then all demands are selected for optimization In this example we want to optimize all demands so leave these three fields blank Setting Options for Net Groom 6 18 2 In the bottom of the Net Groom Fetch Demands window you can specify several options for Net Groom In the Use links of this status when finding new routes field you may select All Live Planned Live or New Planned Live If All is selecte
229. ombine A Z with Z A checkbox to use the higher of the two directions doubled as an approximation of the total bandwidth of demands in the A to Z and Z to A directions combined Alternatively you could also uncheck it 1f you want to see the exact summation of the bandwidth of demands in the A to Z direction and the bandwidth of demands in the Z to A direction In the latter case two rows are displayed for each node pair rather than one 41 Check the Placed demands only checkbox to only consider the bandwidth of demands that have been placed in the current model of the network 42 Change the Show at most textbox to 10 to view the 10 node pairs with the largest bandwidth Then click OK to view the following window This table has a row for each node pair showing A Z and the total bandwidth It is sorted by bandwidth with the largest at the top To sort by a different field or to change between ascending and descending order click on the corresponding column header 43 Click Highlight All to highlight all the node pairs shown in the table Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 7 11 VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION 7 12 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADDING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS T his chapter describes how to add nodes and links to a network model through the WANDL client When to use Use these procedures when you want to create your own network model using the WANDL client Alternatively you ca
230. omewhere your input keystrokes may no longer be in response to the questions they were originally given in response to To see an example where the questions change and the input no longer gets used the same way try the same command used for spec dog for a spec file like u wandl sample fish spec mpls fish Because spec mpls fish is a router network the questions are different For example one such question is Update demand routing tables default yes y n The corresponding input is the number 7 which was meant to select Backbone Design from the main menu That no longer happens since when the menu does appear the corresponding input is the number 3 which takes one into the Network Information menu item Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc
231. on in the upper left corner of the second table above the scroll bar to unlock Click on it again to lock Differences are shown by the colored text in the tables Entries that are marked in RED signify that the line was edited Entries in GREEN in the older revision file signify that the line was deleted Entries in BLUE in the newer revision file signify that the line was added 7 The function buttons at the bottom of the tables allows you to traverse through the list of differences between the two files Clicking on these buttons allows you to jump forward to the next difference jump forward to the last difference reverse to the previous difference reverse to the first difference and go to the current difference 4d IL D D Figure 21 10 Different Function Buttons for Forward Reverse and Save 8 The file comparison tools also allow the user to save these differences onto a text file on the client machine Click on the disk button to save the current differences between the two selected files A Save window will appear to let the user select the folder to save to and the name of the text file as shown in Figure 21 11 Se O I I I x Look in CA Desktop v Es ft El oo En EJ MSWindouws EE WandlTrainingTapes on Chef Adobe Photoshop 5 5 Ink A Chn_TrafficModeling tutorial OF 01 pdf Chn_TrafficModeling tutorial OF OF pdf Exceed 4DMCP Broadcast Ink A IFAT client for Mindows Ink ME ie lent for Windows Ink File n
232. on pull down menu and buttons get activated as shown in Figure 15 2 Simulation Windows Help DOC Figure 15 2 Simulation Menu and Buttons Activated From left to right these buttons are the Run Selected Simulation Step and Stop buttons Run is used to start the simulation using the currently defined simulation parameters and scripts Step allows the user to step through a simulation A step consists of the rerouting of a single demand The step option may be used to continue the simulation one event at a time This feature is applicable only after a running simulation has been stopped Stop is used to stop the current simulation run Note Step and Run are for use with interactive simulation but not for scripted simulation 4 Click on the Simulation pull down menu Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc SIMULATION 5 Click the menu again to close it Then select Tools gt Options gt Failure Simulation and note the menu items for Failure Simulation Click on the different options panes to view the different options These options include what to include or exclude when running simulations For more information see the Reference Guide chapter The Tools Menu IPAMPLS View Options General Failure Simulation Backbone Design Contig Editor Demand Tunnel Sizing Path Placement Failure Analysis Failure Simulation Include fail 0 Trunks in Link Failures yes No Auto Screenshot FRR Exclude Currently Unplaced Dema
233. on should be the same as that included in the Properties and Location tabs of the View Nodes window The node location was probably specified by NPA NXX but someone probably later rearranged the nodes so that they were not in their geographical locations 86 Click Close to close the View Nodes window For more information on network information accessible through the right click menu refer to the Reference Guide chapter on topology Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 21 i Finding Network Elements on the Map 87 To locate a network element right click on the topology view and select Find Nodes Groups from the pull down menu of the left pane of the topology window Automatically the left pane pull down menu will be set to the Network Elements gt Nodes view as shown in Figure 6 29 Nodes v Userdefined Find Case sensitive __Find Next Next _FindNex FindPrev _ FindPrev Prey _ Close Figure 6 29 Find Nodes Groups Window and Node List 88 Type in HO or some other string contained in HOU and then press lt Enter gt or click Find Next The Node named HOU will be highlighted in the Nodes list and on the map 89 Click Close to close the Find Nodes Groups window Alternatively you can directly select the element you want from the Nodes list to highlight on the map 90 Try finding a link using the Find Links option in the topology view right click menu This time the Network E
234. on the section between 90 and 100 to get a pop up menu as shown below and select the option Edit Color The following Edit Color window will be displayed as shown in Figure 6 3 that will allow you to choose a different color for that section of the utilization bar amp Edit Color Swatches PAS HSL RGB MONT E E C LL f E a a T A Cae ae ae ae a ae SRE Add Divider Change Max Change Viewing Range H Show Selected Color Show All Show None Reset to Defaults ee ae eee Tae V p aa COTTON CT ETS BREL Preview m EI M Sample Text Sample Text in E w O Sample Text Sample Text Figure 6 3 Choose A Color Window 4 Selecta color using any one of the options The simplest way is just to click on a swatch of the desired color For example select orange The Preview pane on the bottom of the window will give you an idea of how your color will look against black white and gray and in text Click OK to see the resulting map Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 3 i 5 Next right click on a large section of the color bar like the one between 0 and 40 Select Add Divider and youll find that a new divider will be added at the place where you right clicked As with the other color dividers you may also use your mouse to drag and move the new divider up and down 6 Sometimes if there are links in the network model that are ov
235. ons and weights Search SE Wise Source Locations ssa JE nou ance J _ tein Figure 20 5 Traffic Generation Wizard Select Destination Locations 6 A demand flow can be either simplex one way or full duplex bi directional A 10 MB simplex demand from NodeA to NodeB constitutes only 10 MB of traffic from NodeA to NodeB A 10 MB full duplex demand from NodeA to NodeB constitutes 10 MB of traffic from NodeA to NodeB and 10 MB of traffic from NodeB to NodeA E Traffic Generation Wizard Step 2 Configure demands Configure the demand direction Simplex Each demand counts toward bandwidth from source to destination only Full Duplex Each demand counts toward O bandwidth from both source to destination and destination to source Back Next gt Cancel Hem Figure 20 6 Traffic Generation Wizard Configure Simplex Duplex The next step allows the user to configure the paring schema There are three possible options Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 20 5 eee Full Mesh indicates that demands will be created between all possible pairs of locations between the source list and destination list including identical locations Thus if NYC is in both source and destination lists a demand will be created from NYC to itself If NYC is a group this will create intra group demands if NYC is a node a demand will still be created but it will be deactivated Identical Pairs indicate
236. ons in Figure 7 9 the Console and Map will indicate whether your demand fails to be placed because of insufficient available bandwidth 37 Note that this is a temporary what if study No changes will be made to your network model 38 From the Network gt Path amp Capacity menu you can also select e Diverse Path to find out if there is enough bandwidth to route two circuits in node disjoint diverse paths between a given pair of nodes If node disjoint paths are not found edge disjoint paths will be searched for If edge disjoint paths are not found the program engine will search for paths with a minimum number of common nodes or edges e Site Path to check if there is enough bandwidth to route a path between two selected sites e Site Diverse Path to check if two node disjoint diverse paths exist between sites e Equivalent Path routers only to see an equivalent path list between two nodes 7 10 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION Viewing Aggregate Demand Information 39 To view the total bandwidth between pairs of nodes A and Z in the network sorted by bandwidth in descending order select Network gt Elements gt Demands Right click a demand and select Aggreg Demands to get the following window Aggregate Demand Param eters x W Combine AZ with Z A C1 Placed demands only Show at most 20 cancel Figure 7 11 Aggregate Demand Parameters 40 Checkmark the C
237. oose Location Using wi Mouse City Country J NPANXX J LatiLon Properties Location Country US UNITED ST ID INA City lt Name node IP Address NPAM amp Lata 999999 0 Hardware MUx X Lat Lon 15 360574 155 55554 VIH EIN 0 0 Comment O O Add Reset Close Help Figure 8 3 The Add Node window 8 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADDING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS 5 The only required field is the ID field Type in the ID N1 name nodel and an appropriate hardware type for your network 6 By default Choose Location Using Mouse will be selected Click over to the topology window or select Windows gt Map Standard and you will see that the cursor will become a cross hair on the map Click on the desired location for the node Notice that the coordinates are automatically inserted in the Add Node window In the Add Node window click on Add The node gets added to the location you specified using your mouse 7 The Add Node window will remain open This time enter the ID N2 and name node2 In the Location section click on the NPANXX checkbox and specify the NPANXX data in the NPANXX textbox Click on Add The node gets added to the location with the NPANXX you specified 8 Adda third node with ID as N3 and name node3 In the Location section check the City Co
238. or alternatively the preempt priorities assigned to demands Backbone designs can also be either green field designs or incremental designs A green field design is a design from scratch In this case one starts with only nodes and demands but no links In incremental design you already have some nodes and links but you want to determine the optimal places to add new links to keep up with changing traffic requirements Or you may want to know based on the current traffic which links can be removed When to use Use the Resize option to adjust the bandwidth of the backbone links based on on the normal traffic load or based on peak simulation results Use backbone design when you are trying to determine how many trunks you need to buy and where to place them at an optimal price You can use diversity design to increase the reliability of your system by providing for redundancy Since diversity design can be significantly more expensive than basic design you may want to try comparative studies to see the extra cost of redundancy Also it must be stressed that the program uses heuristics and so it will aim at finding a reasonably low cost solution in a reasonable amount of time as opposed to ensuring the absolute lowest price solution which could take days or weeks to determine depending on the network size Also note that the design may take into account user defined constraints while searching for a reasonable solution There are variou
239. or none The opaque option will not display overlapping groups Tip Note that drawing translucent discs consumes more resources than drawing quick rings If your overall performance appears to be slow when you have groups in your network you may want to consider drawing quick rings INVERTING COLORS 31 Click on the white box to the right of Background to change the topology view s background color Select a black swatch and click OK in the Choose A Color window The Foreground text and Mouse Drag Lines should now be changed so that they can be seen against the black background Change these both to white in the same way for a map such as that in Figure 6 12 ow Wap Standard Fa cisco FOUNDRY JUNIPER Gry Groups Discs Figure 6 12 Map After Changing Map Preferences 32 To turn on the country maps and node labels displayed in the above figure using the map s right click menu options refer to Displaying Geographical Maps on page 6 8 and Network Element Labels on page 6 6 33 For printing purposes however it is probably better to go with the default white background So open the Map Preferences window again from Tools gt Options gt Map Preferences and click on the Defaults button Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 9 i Topology Layout 6 10 34 In the topology view right click menu under Layout are several options described below RECALCULATE LAYOUT Where no saved latitude longi
240. ork element Add On Features Discrete Event Packet by packet simulation is available for Frame Relay and Router Simulation device models giving statistics on queueing delays and packet loss ratios Domain Structured Partitioned or structured networks including PNNI are supported by Networks this WANDL software Device specific support of domains is also correctly modeled Traffic Load Analysis Real traffic load per demand can be loaded into the software model to obtain a more accurate link utilization for failure simulations The WANDL software can do multi period load and performance analyses Facility Feature Any number of nodes and or links can be grouped together in a facility for failure scenarios and reporting options Class of Service CoS The class of service feature allows the user to classify traffic into four Feature classes including the strict priority class With this feature the accuracy of WANDL s Design and Discrete Event Simulation modules are greatly improved as the software takes into account all the details of Class Based Weighted Fair Queueing CBWFQ in its routing process Customer Tariff The Customer Tariff allows the user to specify various tariff classes and their rates for the network Each node is associated with a particular tariff class All links would then be priced according to its service and the classes of the nodes it connects 1 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Supported
241. orm your design you may want to save the demand path routing using Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Interactive Mode and then select Update Preferred Path Setting if your hardware supports the path select feature IPAMPLSWiew Options General Path Placement Reserved Bandwidth Backbone Design et Config Editor DeamandTunnel Sizing He Pah Placement A Reserve Bandwidth File None ARETE St Ee Ethernet Fat 0 00 BGP a ooo ECMP i Default Fat i 0 00 Hardware 4 Default Fixed Fat Multicast a MPLS TE a la hits kb MPLS TE LSP Tunnel Att i Reserved Bandwidth Failure Simulatio Figure 14 13 Reserved Bandwidth Design Options USING THE NODEWEIGHT FILE The nodeweight file is used to assign a node weight and maximum link bandwidth capacity for each node as well as to influence path placement These can both influence design The file format is as follows nodeID name node weight max bw capacity max transit bw ATL 100 40 0M BOS 10 0M CHI 100 2 0M DEN BLOCK Note that a node weight of 1 can be used as a placeholder if users do not want to specify a node weight See the File Format Guide for more on the nodeweight file under The Control Files section 14 16 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc DESIGN During design the weight if less than 100000 is used as a penalty for purchasing links at the node during a design The program will pick the path with the sh
242. ort SVG in Batch Mode SSma World mapep LS ae ead Wap Hel Europe Asia China Figure 6 22 Zoom Submenu e Zoom To Fit Selection is similar to Zoom To Fit but it is designed to zoom in or out so that the set of selected node and links which can now be a subset of the entire network fits nicely in the topology display area e Zoom To Fit Region allows you to zoom to a particular region such as World United States Europe or Asia e Center At Click is used to center the topology map at a certain point After clicking on this option click the cursor at the point on the topology map that you would like to make the center of the map 66 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in and out on the map 67 Click the globe icon on the toolbar to turn off the navigator display Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc i Grouping Functions 6 18 68 Select Grouping to group and re group nodes in a way that is most logical for your network and for you to understand When you form a new group you will be asked to name the group See the Grouping options in Figure 6 23 Collapse All Expand All Group Selected Ungroup Selected Ungroup All Modify Parent Gp of Selected AutoGroup Figure 6 23 Grouping Menu Options Tip 1 The topology map s toolbar on the far right side of the map includes shortcuts for the Group Selected and Ungroup Selected features which are the first two icons on the toolbar in respec
243. ort to the client Select Columns show All Columns Resetthe Column Order Auto Fit All Columns Rie Generate Report Save Whole Reportto Client Save Filtered Reportto Client Convert report Exportto Excel Generate filter script Help Figure 19 4 Right click Menu To save only the rows that have been filtered by the Filter option below the report table select Save Filtered Report to Client Reports can be saved to CSV for opening in a thirdparty application on your PC client such as Microsoft Excel Right click on a report from the left pane and select Export to Excel CSV to save the report in CSV format to your client PC Alternatively right click on a report from the left pane and select Convert Report for XML CSV or HTML By default this option only saves the report on the server Select the Copy to client option in order to save a copy of the report to your PC client Include the file extension e g CSV in the filename you are saving to For reports that have been saved on the server the generated files may also be viewed from the Report Viewer if it is in comma separated format Go to the File Manager and navigate to the current output directory Click the Refresh button in the File Manager and highlight the file that was generated by the Report Manager Right click on that file and select Open in Report Viewer from the popup menu Note Most comma separated reports can be viewed in the Report Viewer El
244. ortest cost in determining how to place a demand Note that you can also set a node weight greater than or equal to 100000 or enter in NOPASS to to mark a node as an end node in order to avoid pass through traffic when in design mode Or if weight BLOCK instead of a numeric weight this disables any passthrough traffic through that node in design and simulation modes The default node weight is 0 During design no link will be added originating or destinating at a node if the the maximum bandwidth capacity for that node will be exceeded The Default Maximum Link Bandwidth Capacity is infinite 51 From the WANDL client you can also set these parameters from the Modify Node window s Design Properties tab shown in the figure below Properties Advanced Properties Design Properties BGP IP VoIP UserParameters Service Profile Name NONE v Node Weight 100 Max Trunk BWW i Om Block from adding new trunks false v Max Transit Demand Count Max Transit Demand BY Gateway False Area for design only NONE v Accessible Area List Fail 0 false Vret NONE Figure 14 14 Specifying Design Constraints on a Node Note After you perform your design you may want to save the demand routing using Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Interactive Mode and then select Update Preferred Path Setting if your hardware supports the path select feature
245. owing is an example of the console after a link failure flow2 ATL CHI 730 017K R A2Z 02 02 ATL WDC CHI delay 11 215ms DISCONNECTED flow2 ATL CHI 730 017K R A2Z 02 02 ATL HOU DAL CHI delay 17 202ms REROUTED flow50 DEN NYC 714K R A2Z 02 02 DEN CHI WDC PHI NYC delay 17 163ms DISCONNECTED Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc SIMULATION flow50 DEN NYC 714K R A2Z 02 02 DEN CHI DET BOS NYC delay 19 532ms REROUTED A Paths window will open displaying a graphical view of the demand routing before and after the demand was disconnected 22 Continue to step through all the disconnected demands or click Run to simulate all demands You can stop the simulation by clicking the Stop button on the Interactive Scenarios window or the square icon on the main toolbar 23 When you are done with the failure simulation click the Reset Simulation button to restore all devices taken down into operation Subsequent failures can also be performed additively if one does not invoke the reset View Changes 24 After the simulation is run select View Changes gt View Link Changes to see the impact of the simulation upon the link utilization and RSVP utilization O Changed Links 5 LinkName Node Interface Util Origutt UtilDiff RSVP Util Org RSVP JRSVPULIDiT LINK 2 down 0 4628 0 0000 LINKI 8 BL E 09275 00m LINK2 ATL ow CE e LINK2 ATL down BBA ooon Pay LINK3 BOS ge 00098 0 0643 0 0643 0
246. pears as green 75 to 90 appears as magenta and 90 to 100 appears as red Both the colors and the range of utilization can be changed and added Notice that some of the links are solid in color and some of them are half one color and half another color The presence of two different colors indicates that the utilization in one direction A gt Z is different from the utilization in the other direction Z gt A The half of the link originating from a certain node is colored according to the link utilization in the direction from that node to the other node 2 On the color bar drag the separator between two colors up and down to move the separator and release it at the desired position The number to the right of the separator indicates the utilization percentage corresponding to the selected position For example move the separator between the dark blue segment and light blue segment of the bar currently at 25 0 up to 40 0 and notice some formerly light blue Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS links are now dark blue as shown in Figure 6 2 The reason is because there were some links of utilization between 25 0 and 40 0 and the color for that portion of the bar was changed oa Map Standard Planned Util 100 0 90 0 75 0 Figure 6 2 MPLS Fish Network After Changing Planned Util Legend Settings 3 Right click
247. pick a directory from the select box by clicking on the arrow to the right of the Current Path field 3 To create a directory for your network files right click on the bottom right larger pane of the File Manager and select New gt Directory from the right click menu 4 The New Directory pop up window will appear Specify a name for the directory e g examplel and then click on OK New Directory x ay Enter directory name a examplet ooo O ok _cancet Figure 4 2 New Directory Window If you have files already in WANDL file format named as lt filetype gt lt runcode gt according to WANDL s file name convention discussed in File Names on page 2 2 copy them to this directory before continuing to the next step Otherwise you can add those files to your specification later on 4 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc CREATING amp EDITING A NETWORK MODEL CREATE A SPEC FILE 5 Scroll down on the File Manager window until you see the new directory you created and double click it Note that the Current Path changes automatically when you open that folder 6 Right click over the bottom right pane of the File Manager window and select Spec File gt New Spec from the popup menu or select File gt New Network from the main menu to display the Spec File Generation window as shown in Figure 4 3 Spec File Director fuswandiidatafexamplet Browse General pesmi Parameterem NET ATEN
248. pology windows provide you with the ability to display multiple protocol specific views of the T his chapter describes how to display work with and customize the layout of the various topology windows network In a topology window you can control whether or not to display and whether or not to turn on labels for the network s nodes and links When to use Use these procedures to display use and customize the graphical depiction of the network topology when a spec file is created or opened and to access network information through the map Prerequisites You should open a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project To follow along with the example in this chapter open sample IP fish spec mpls fish If you do not have the required passwords refer to Following Along with the Examples in this Manual on page I 1 Related Documentation To learn how to open a spec file refer to Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project For information on topology settings that are saved and for details on additional topology features not discussed in this chapter refer to the General Reference Guide Topology chapter Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of topology window usage and the associated recommended procedures 1 Legends Learn how to use the left pane legends and change color settings in the legends as described in Using the Legends on page 6 2 and Customiz
249. ption 3 If a parameter file dparam file is indicated in the spec file this file will then be treated as the default parameter file To avoid overwriting the default parameter file enter a new filename under which the information is to be saved The following prompts are displayed when option 3 is selected Enter parameter file name default dparam x dparam y Parameter Settings saved in file dparam y View the file dparam y default no y n 18 Select option 4 All for the following messages In order to save the design environment a directory name and runcode must be specified All related configuration and parameter files will be saved to the directory specified with the runcode appended to the end of each file Enter q to quit Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc TEXT MODE Enter directory name default directory space wandl sample fish test Directory test created Enter runcode default x gt gt Design environment saved in directory space wandl sample fish test Runcode set to x 19 In the above example the statement default directory space wandl sample fish means the default directory is set to space wandl sample fish which is the current working directory To save the design environment in a directory other than the current one specify the name of the destination directory Note that if you want to use the same directory you can select lt Enter gt to accept the default in parentheses
250. ptions 29 Then click the Run button in the Failure Simulation Scripts window After the simulation is finished click OK in the information window which informs you of where the statistical simulation output is saved 30 Open the Report Manager from Report gt Report Manager and select Simulation Reports gt Network Statistics or Simulation Reports gt Detailed Simulation to see the Peak Link Utilization report and other generated reports 15 8 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc SIMULATION 31 Additionally report information will be displayed on the console one for each script selected Each report will indicate the simulation sequence simulation options and simulation results For the Node Failure Simulation Report there is one report record for each node If demands originally passing through the node failed to be rerouted the number of such demands are recorded in parentheses after the corresponding node Max Avg Info on Failed Demands LkBw NODE Hop Hop Count Bandwidth BwRat HPr OvSub ATL T oe 0 0 0 0 O0 5 BOS Go Bel 0 0 0 0 1 CHI T Se 0 0 0 08 0 4 PHI T Zah 0 0 0 0 O0 7 In the summary section of this report we see that the worst case occurred when node PHI was failed The PHI failure is the worst in this simulation because it happens to result in the highest amount of oversubscribed links Worst link bandwidth violation occurred at Node PHI PHILADELPHIA Violation occur
251. r indicates the total cost of all the links in the network If not right click on the map and select Show Message from the popup menu If you are following along with the spec wandi sample network the topology map displays a price of 0 for this network The asterisk indicates that the network links are not priced as explained in the Console window 2 12 Links Total Link Cost 0 Links not priced 12 ICustom Rates The custom rates feature allows you to define or customize your own link rate table The basic idea is to first categorize your nodes into certain classes called custom rate classes Then define the link pricing formula for various trunk types that are purchased between nodes of particular classes Below is a list of some possible applications for customized link rates e You wish to model different pricing schemes for links between different countries or regions In this case the custom rate classes can be used to classify nodes based upon country or region Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 12 1 Be 12 2 Your network defines the hierarchy level of the nodes e g CORE REGULAR ACCESS etc and you would like to encourage discourage the purchase of links between certain hierarchy level types Custom rates can be used to influence the network design as the WANDL software will compute a design that minimizes the network cost You have your own method of categorizing nodes on which the pricing schemes
252. random order If there is insufficient bandwidth to place a demand the program will try to squeeze it in by rerouting other local paths Demands are placed subject to user specified constraints Console Mode Description Interactive Turn on this mode to have the program ask before it makes a specific change to the routing Verbose Turn on this mode to have the program display what changes it makes to the routing 16 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc PATH PLACEMENT Detailed Procedures 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Design and select the Design gt Path Placement option pane as shown below in Figure 16 1 L Wandl Options General Design Path Placement Config Editor Currency Table Design Diversity Max Hop C MPLS DS TE Routing Method Gope v CverSubscription 1 00 Path Placement Reserved Bandwidth Placement Order High Priority High Bandwidth Demands First Scramble Resize Tunnel Sizing Path Selection Method Hardware Implementation YolP Dewte Peak Rate Requirement jgnored 7 Discrete Event Simulation 5 5 ue Allow Negative Available Capacity Failure Simulation s pacii Hardware Default Hardware MPLS Enabled Mode ay Li hail inks Enabled Integrity Checks LSP Tunnel Attributes Max ECMP Count ssid USS eee et OOOM Wap Preferences Serer Enable PIM True od FIM Mode ssm 7 Tarif Frame Size 256 Force PBR Check False v ISP Override False v
253. rangements for another map 83 Click OK when the appropriate setting has been selected 6 20 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Accessing Node Information from the Map 84 After highlighting some nodes right click over a node and select View gt Selected Nodes from the right click menu Depending on what network element you click the right click menu may vary 85 Note that the displayed window s top bar displays the number of nodes selected Click on the Location tab for the selected node You will see the window shown in Figure 6 28 pe Neto ln Network Name Hardware Lata NPA _NXX Count IP_Address AS RouteRefl BGP Speaker Fiter eee gt a QS 6Gof14 displayed ga DALLAS ee 552 214 951 US UNDEF HOUSTON R 560 281 872 Us UNDEF E3 E3 Summary posto es SANDIEGO WASHDC 730 213 626 us UNDEF 732 zeo 277 jus UNDEF 236 703 448 US UNDEF r ATLANTA e438 404 724 US UNDEF OOOO Location Interfaces ID ATL Country Us Name ATLANTA NPANXN Lata 4047 24 438 Lat Lon 33 781208 84 391785 Demands WH EH 7255 2088 Other Nodes lt As Highlight Highlight All Ma Figure 6 28 View Nodes Window If you hover your pointer over the node labelled ATLANTA on the map you will see in the bottom status pane of the topology window ATL ATLANTA CISCO 404724 This informati
254. rated Date Available Web Reports Topology Map March 07 2013 16 08 55 Network Standard Topology March 07 2013 16 07 31 Network Standard Topology March 07 2013 15 05 35 Network Standard Topology Figure 6 40 Available Web Reports and Topology Maps Map Standard fuAwandl sample router fish spec mpls fish Thu Mar 07 16 58 51 EST 2013 Figure 6 41 Web Topology Map 115 The SVG file contains icons for zooming in and out of the map or for resetting the map to the original size Place your mouse over a node or link to get basic details about the node or link Panning is also supported by dragging the map Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION information Detailed information on nodes links and demands may be retrieved directly from the map through right click popup menus or by selecting the network element type of interest from the Network menu Network information can also be seen from the status bar console and file manager Various other functions can be accessed through the Network menu such as demand path routing and customized rate tables for pricing links n this chapter you will learn how to view and save network information such as node link and demand When to use Use these procedures to retrieve node link and demand information and find out how additional demands will be routed Note that this chapter is only a sampler of different ways to
255. ration Hop Hop Count Bandwidth BwRat HPr OvSub iteration l 2 2 0 0 00 2 iteration 2i T 29 0 0 0 03 0 2 iteration oF 7 249 0 0 0 05 0 2 iteration 4 wee oO 0 0 0 05 0 2 iteration 5i T Aeg 0 0 0 0 2 iteration G3 T Aad 0 0 0 05 0 2 iteration ri T Zeg 0 0 0 05 0 2 iteration Dl To gay 0 0 0 05 0 2 iteration T 2al 0 0 0 05 0 2 iteration 10 T 2 amp 9 0 0 0 03 0 2 Worst link bandwidth violation occurred at iteration 1 Violation occurred at 2 links In tuning mode demands are placed or their paths are added 1f there is sufficient bandwidth and either the demand was previously unplaced or a better path has been found First use the sequential method which will try to route demands without rerouting other demands to make room If some of the demands are still not placed then try the free run mode to allow the rerouting of other demands when necessary to make room for a new one in the case of insufficient bandwidth NON INTERACTIVE MODE There is a menu Design gt Demands gt Route Paths to directly access the tuning option in non interactive sequential mode without going through the Console 3 To directly run tuning in non interactive sequential mode select either Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Tune All Paths or Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Tune Unplaced Paths The former option will try to place unplaced demands and improve on already placed paths The latter option will only try to place unplaced demands
256. rder if you did not set the paths to be preferred or required PATH COMPARISON 18 Option 4 Path Comparison on the Path Placement Menu allows the user to compare a demand s new path with its original path The differences are then saved in the file RTPATHRPT runcode If there are no differences in the demand paths no report file will be saved Each difference is shown by putting the old and new demand entries back to back Below is an example Orig ckt45 N02 NU7 4800 R 12 12 N2 N3 NI N New ckt45 NO2 N07 4800 R 12 12 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 The file indicates the name of the demand file from which the original path came from and the number of different routing paths RESET PATHS TO ROUTING IN DEMAND FILE 19 Select Design gt Demands gt Route Paths gt Restore to reset the path placement to the contents of the demand input file This will allow you to perform a new tuning experiment starting from the original demand paths Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc PATH PLACEMENT Network Grooming Due to the dynamic rerouting of circuits during node or link failure demand placement in the network may gradually become sub optimal The Network Grooming option looks at the current placement and the best placement of a demand placement if it is the first demand placed From the analysis report you can see how optimal a demand path is The program can then use this information to improve the path placement If your hardware supports t
257. re information on the optional control file formats For supplemental cost control files that require license e g custrate file or which may be hardware device specific please see the respective document for the file format Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 19 DESIGN 14 Create Simplified Group Model The Create Simplified Group Model helps simplify the network topology by consolidating multiple nodes at the same site into one node The consolidated node keeps the inter site traffic however intra site traffic is ignored This means the links and demands between sites are kept for modelling while links and demands within the site are discarded Nodes marked as supercore are not effected by the consolidation This creates a simplified network topology where sites are represented as single nodes connected to a backbone of supercore nodes and the traffic matrix is re mapped to this simplified network topology Simplified Group Model Walkthrough 1 Open the spec mpls fsh network located at u wandl sample original router fish 2 Select and Group nodes BOS NYC and PHI into a group called EAST 3 Select and Group nodes SFO SJC LAX and SDG into a group called WEST 4 Select and Group the remaining nodes into a group called SUPERCORE or SUPERGROUP Both are special keywords that can used for grouping Nodes in this special group will not be consolidated 5 da Map Standard Planned Util v Hi D Ge 5
258. rection Click OK 20 Now click the Update button on the main menu bar Click Yes to the subsequent dialog box to adjust path placement for all the demands From the Console window you can see an indication that all seven demands are placed 21 Right click over the link between N1 and N2 and select Delete Link Click Yes in the subsequent confirmation dialog box Click the Update button and adjust the path placement of all demands This time the console message indicates that 3 demands become unplaced as a consequence Iteration 7 PVCs 4 placed 3 unplaced 0 deactivated 22 In View mode go back to the Demands window Network gt Elements gt Demands and click Filter dah to open the Find Demands window again In the Status section make sure that only Unplaced is checked Click OK to view the three unplaced demands Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 9 5 9 6 Demands ID Is NodeDetai N NodeDetall Wy AZ BV PAT Type FA Pri Pre Current Route e onfigured Secondary Owner Actions 23 24 25 3 000M 1 000M R NRT RNRT 07 07 750 0K 0 RNRT 0707 NoPret NONE 3 000M 1 000M R NRT R NRT 0707 NoPret NONE Figure 9 10 Three Unplaced Demands To examine why these demands failed to be placed you can take a look at the available capacity on the existing links To do so you can select the Links view also
259. red Select a file to be compared Path itm pimariaimisci Go BBDSGN TRC NETGROOM 106_9 dparam test linkconf Pure_PNNI linkconf Pure_PNNI_NewPari spec test Selected file s Hote Selecting different type of WWANDL file is not allowed File 1 laceimpat34 1 1 O7 samplefrouter dogidparam dog File 2 tmpimariaimiscidparam test Ca cs Figure 21 14 Select Two WANDL Files To Be Compared 15 With radio button selected on File 1 select the first file you wish to compare 16 Select radio button on File 2 and highlight the file you wish to compare with file 1 17 After you have selected the two files click Ok to show the comparison linkconf Display Option The Display Option menu option is only available for the 1inkconf file With this feature the user can select which columns to display in the table of the file comparison tools and place them in a specific order 18 Click on the linkconf file under the Files Types section of the File Comparison Revision Manager window this file is not available on all hardware modules 19 Right click on the filename and select Display Option from the pop up menu 20 The Display Option window will appear as shown in Figure 21 15 that allows you to select the columns to display from the left hand side of the window Select From Highlight one or more items from the left side of the window To select more than one
260. red at 7 links On the basis of such information the user may decide to run a backbone diversity design See Chapter 14 Design for more details on diversity design 32 Note that if you wish to create a separate link utilization report for each individual failure this is possible from the command line interface For more information refer to Generating One Report Per Failure on page 15 13 EXHAUSTIVE DOUBLE AND TRIPLE ELEMENT FAILURES 33 To test the scenarios of any two or three elements failing at the same time select Simulation gt Predefined Scenarios and select the Multiple Failures tab F Simulation Scenarios Single Failure Multiple Failures Report Options Advanced Options Multiple Network Element Failure z Double I Triple O Cases to Simulate Exhaustive Failure Failure Types W Mode Link _ Site _ Slot _ Card _ SRLGFacility _ Parallel Links Figure 15 11 Exhaustive Multiple Failure Simulation 34 Check Exhaustive Failure and then select Double or Triple for the number of simultaneous failures Then select the element link node site facility or line that you want to fail Click Run from the same window to begin the failure 35 In the console window every pair of elements will be indicated followed by the tunnel and then demand statistics relating to maximum number of hops average number of hops number of demands failed bandwidth of failed demands etc Max Avg Info on Failed Demands
261. ricing 3 Finally you need to create a set of demands which the design will try to accommodate by modifying the demand file or adding demands from the Modify gt Elements gt Demands menu Refer to Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands for instructions on adding demands 4 Ifyou already have some links in your network that you do not wished to be removed during the design process from the graphical interface go to Modify gt Elements gt Links modify all the links and set the fixlink property to true 5 Before performing a backbone diversity design you should also define a site file in case there are nodes at the same site Refer to Chapter 10 Modifying Sites Owners Etc for more information on this This tutorial will use spec uk located in the SWANDL HOME sample original atm uk directory This example already has defined geographical coordinates and demands If you do not have the password for GENATM Generic ATM please refer to Following Along with the Examples in this Manual on page I 1 Note that for different hardware design and diversity design results may differ You should know how to add and modify your network as explained in Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands and Chapter 9 Modifying Nodes Links and Demands Related Documentation Definitions For a detailed description of the design options refer to the General Reference Guide Refer to the File Format Guide for a detailed descriptio
262. rks Inc 6 11 i 40 To select all nodes select Select gt All Points from the right click menu of the topology map window to see all the nodes highlighted in yellow LINK SELECTION 41 Links can be highlighted in yellow on the topology map by clicking directly on the link on the map If exactly one link is selected node labels will appear at its endpoints Additional links can be added to a selection by lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift clicking additional links or holding down lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift gt while dragging a rectangle around both endpoints of the links 42 Before you click your mouse to select any element note that the element your pointer is over will be listed in the status area on the left side of the bottom of the topology window REARRANGING SELECTED POINTS 43 To rearrange points highlight the nodes you want to move Then press down on one of the highlighted nodes and drag the points together to the desired location Remember that what you change will not be saved unless you save the work environment or save the graphical coordinates 44 To move points only of a certain type select Filters gt Type in the drop down menu in the left pane of the topology window Deselect the node types you do not want to move For example in our example to move only Juniper routers deselect the Cisco and Foundry checkboxes as shown in Figure 6 15 5 da Map Standard 18 link cost 2811428 i CISCO C FOUNDRY i JUNIP
263. rks and reopen them for the changes to take effect 60 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS T his chapter describes how to modify nodes and links to a network model through the WANDL client When to use Use these procedures when you want to modify your own network model using the WANDL client Alternatively you can modify your own network model by editing network files like the node file muxloc and link file bblink according to WANDL file format Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you must have created a spec file as described in Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model or opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You then should continue with these procedures to modify a spec file To follow along with the first part of the current tutorial you should have created spec triangle3 as explained in Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands You can also use another example and simply adjust the instructions accordingly You also should have an overview of the WANDL software functionality Related Documentation For an overview of the WANDL software or for a detailed description of each feature and the use of each window refer to the General Reference Guide Recommended Instructions Following is a tutorial to help the user learn different methods to modifying nodes links and demands Modify a node and two links using
264. rs offer a flexible way of organizing your demands You can associate owners with the demands belonging to your different network customers Or you can associate owners with demands belonging to different network applications different internal departments etc Using owners in your WANDL network model can also facilitate reporting because many of the demand related reports can be sorted by owner 11 Note In this section you can follow along using the spec file in u wandl sample IP fish In Modify mode go to Modify gt Elements gt Owners to bring up the Owners view Click Add popup a textbox at the top of the window Specify an owner name in the text field and click the Add button next 12 13 14 to the textbox In this example we will use WANDL 1 el ee Co ae Figure 10 4 Owners Window Modify Mode The next step is to select a number of demands and modify their owner type to this new owner value Let s suppose for this example that all the demands between N1 and N7 are owned by WANDL Select Demands gt Add Modify Delete from the Modify menu Select one or more demands belonging to this owner Use the filter bar to find demands with specific criteria When you have highlighted all demands belonging to the owner press the Modify button and select All Entries Then from the Owner selection box select WANDL and click OKR Now switch back into View mode to view the results of th
265. rver to make the cost of a link through a node prohibitively high so that no link will be routed through it The format is as follows NA NZ vendor type cost mo NO1 NO2 ATT T1 3000 For more details see the File Format Guide 48 This file can be read in using File gt Load Network Files The user should then go to the Network Files tab of the Read window and select the row for the usercost file in the Cost Files section Then select Browse to specify the usercost file location and select the Load button s to read in the file Then when the design 1s performed this file will be used to calculate the cost of the resulting design Since design aims to minimize cost while satisfying user demands making the price between two nodes very high will discourage the program from buying a link there Tip If most of the links in your bblink file have names you can try the following unix command on your server to create your usercost file and simplify the input process awk praint 6 2 93 54 c6 Dblink xx gt usercost xx Warning If you already have a file by the same name as usercost xx this command will overwrite it After using this command you may have to clean up a few lines so they fit the file format Afterward you can add a cost mo for the node pairs for which you wish to specify a cost were a link to be placed there Of course you may Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 15 DESIGN 14 also want to a
266. ry u wandl data y and runcode y Then the files muxloc y nodeparam y bblink y and demand y will be created in u wandl data y Creating Input Files This section indicates how to create input files by hand Refer to Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model for instructions to create a spec file using the graphical user interface Refer to your hardware specific guide or the Reference Guide for information about extraction utilities to automatically convert raw data collected from your network to WANDL file format The minimum information needed in the spec file is the runcode or file extension and the location of a dparam file default parameters file specifying the hardware type The following is an example of a minimum specification comprised of a spec file and dparam file Filename spec x runcode x dparam dparam x Filename dparam x hwvendor GENERIC Note you should choose a hardware vendor that you have permission for in your license file In this example the runcode is x With this basic spec file you can open your empty network in the WANDL client by double clicking on spec x within the File Manager You can then proceed to add nodes links and demands When you save your design environment File gt Save Network select the directory to save the network in and what runcode file extension to save the network files with The default runcode is the runcode listed in the spec file that you initially loaded
267. s are added to the muxloc node file as follows muxloc y Before Save muxloc y After Save comment1 ATL ATLANTA 404 724 lcomment2 BOS BOSTON 617 661 comment4 ATL ATLANTA 404 724 comment3 BOS BOSTON 617 661 comment4 CHI comments As shown in the above example upon saving the file only lines containing valid entries were saved For those lines only comments preceded by a are saved Once the node link and demand files are created they could be referenced from more than one spec file Note that a change to an input file will impact each of the spec files referencing it To avoid changes to a shared input file the owner of these files can set the file write permissions For example to make a file read only you can use a telnet session to the server and enter the following Unix commands cd specfile_directory and chmod 444 filename where filename is substituted by the name of the file to be set as read only DATADIR SPECIFYING THE LOCATION OF INPUT FILES As mentioned earlier the keyword datadir can be used in your spec file to specify the default directory that input files e g muxloc bblink dparam and demand files will be located in The datadir is provided simply for convenience so that you do not have to type out the full path for each of the input files By default the datadir is the directory containing the spec file For any input file either a relative path should be specified from the
268. s network on the left panel Click on the any filename on the left panel of the window to view the contents of the file in a table format on the right side of the window Click on any row in the table to view the context of that line as shown on the bottom right section In the example shown in Figure 21 1 the bblink mpls fish file is shown with LINK3 selected WANDL File Comparison NPAT WANDL file comparison File Types if bblink mpls fish bblink Link Name Node A Interface A Interface Z per LINK ATL ILINK2 ATL demand Aggregated BOS an LINK4 BOS muxloc LINKS ICHI nodeparam ILINK6 CHI LINK CHI ALINK CHI ILINK9 DAL ILINK10 IDEN JLINK11 HOU ALINK12 LAX ILINK13 LAX JLINK14 JLINK15A JLINK15B JLINK16 LINKI8 Total 18 item s i LINK3 BOS DET DEF 1 OC3 DIST 1396 Last updated April 19 2002 9 40 09 AM EDT Figure 21 1 File Comparison window with bblink file selected Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc FILE COMPARISON TOOLS Opening and Using the Revision Manager tool 1 Click on the Tools menu from the main window menu bar and select Revision Manager When the Revision Manager is launched for the first time for a network model the window will appear as shown in Figure 21 2 Revision Manager MPLSView WANDL File Revision Actions Could not get the revisicn information Pos
269. s that demands will be created between identical locations only This is useful when creating intra group or intra pop demands If an identical list of groups is used for both source and destination locations then demands will only be created within a group no demands will be created between groups Diverse Pairs indicates that demands will be created only between locations that are unique For example if NYC appears in both source and destination lists no demands will be created from NYC to itself gi Traffic Generation Wizard x ANDL REA NETWORK DSENGN LAROAATOAY Step 7 Configure demands Configure the pairing schema Specity the schema for generating traffic between source and destination amp Full Mesh Demands will be generated between all source destination pairs Identical Fairs Demands will be generated only between source and destination locations that are the same Diverse Pairs Demands will be generated Ci only between source and destination locations that are different Figure 20 7 Traffic Generation Wizard Configure Pairing Schema The next step is for specifying the total bandwidth of the traffic profile which can be in BW bits number of demands percent of current BW bits or percent of current number of demands If the either of the last two options are selected the amount of traffic created will be a percentage of the current amount of traffic
270. s that differ from the specified link template then it will be listed in the Link Rules Integrity Check Report This helps ensure that all the existing links in the network conform to a set of templates Viewing Link Rules 17 To view the existing link rules first switch to View mode if you are not already in it Select Network gt More gt Link Rules The Link Rules window will appear as shown in Figure 11 7 Description links between cisco and juniper nodes should f arameter of not orange connect to parameter Rule Name Description Max distance between nodes fo Link template Figure 11 7 Link Rules Window 18 Click on the different tabs to view the defined node conditions and relations for each rule The usage for the Node A Conditions tab and the Node Z Conditions tab are identical Properties Node A Conditions Node Z Conditions Node ANode Z Relationship Match of the following Hardware Type Y CISCO Figure 11 8 Link Rules Node A Conditions Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USER PARAMETERS AND LINK RULES Node AMode Z Relationship Match of the following Node A s Hierarchy Level Node Z s Node A s Node z s Figure 11 9 Link Rules Node A Z Relationship Adding Modifying Link Rules 19 Switch to Modify mode and select Modify gt More gt Link Rules The Link Rules window will appear as shown in Figure 11 10 Description tuled it between cisco and j
271. s ways in which you can influence the design to find better solutions and this is strongly encouraged In addition certain assumptions are made that you should be aware of One such assumption is that the hardware allows a degree of control such that certain paths can be specified as preferred or required Hence for certain hardware devices where the path select feature is not supported the program may think that it can be designed without oversubscription when in actuality the end result shows that it cannot In that case the user should try the Resize option after designing the network The user may also wish to try different simulations to see average and worse case scenarios for the particular network Prerequisites PREREQUISITES FOR BACKBONE DESIGN 1 Before performing a design you should make sure that every location in your network has a geographical coordinate assigned to it or an NPA NXX for US Canada from which the geographical coordinate can be derived This can be done either by editing the muxloc file or modifying a node s location properties through the graphical interface The geographical coordinates are used for pricing Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 1 DESIGN 14 2 Additionally you should define the pricing rules to price out the backbone links by creating a custrate or usercost file These are explained towards the end of the chapter For further pricing information refer to Chapter 12 Modifying Link P
272. s window Click Close to close the Links window 23 By now you should have a triangle on the map To label the links right click on the topology map and select Labels gt Links Labels gt Link Labels In the Link Labels window as shown in select All under Show Labels For and Node ID Node ID for What Text Link Labels Show Labels for What Text All C Name O None Node ID Node ID C Only Current Selection C Node Name Node Name Add Current Selection O Customize C Remove Current Selection om cance Figure 8 8 Link Labels window Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 8 5 Ma M2 7 2 T F ts Figure 8 9 Triangle Network with Nodes and Links Labelled Tip You can make a template to simplify the add link process from Modify gt Elements gt Element Templates gt Link Adding Demands 24 Finally you can add demands by selecting Modify gt Elements gt Demands followed by Add gt One Demand or Add gt Multiple Demands 25 Select Modify gt Elements gt Demands to see the window as shown in Figure 8 11 F L a Ei om F L M z yi OIR It IO SEET Network Demands Actions ID ModeDetailk HodeGetail BY AZ By FA Type AZ Type 24 Pri r EE ez Summary CL i Modes j o O 4 L Filter H A GE BOOB ME 0of0 displayed page ti General EEE Eine E Statistics View Demands Total BY Placed BW Unplaced BW Disabled BW 0 0 0 0 Na 0 0 0 O
273. section Opening the Visio Drawing on 6 26 For CSV format please follow the steps below to ensure that the correct stencils are being used 106 In order to get the correct symbols for nodes links groups and text fields you need to provide Visio with WANDL s stencils The instructions below explain how to do this Find the Visio files WandlStencil vss andWandlTemplate vst in your client machine s installation directory and copy them into Visio s Solutions directory e The filesWandlStencil vss andWandlTemplate vst are in the client machine s installation directory which defaults to C Program Files wand1 NPAT4 3 orC Program Files wandl IP MPLSView4 3 for Microsoft Windows clients and to u wandl client visio for Solaris clients e For a standard Visio installation Visio s Solutions directory will be in C Program Files Visio Solutions In Visio 2002 the Solutions directory will be in C Program Files Microsoft Office Visiol0 1033 Solutions the 10 and 1033 may differ on your machine OPENING THE VISIO DRAWING 107 Start Visio and press Cancel to get out of any welcome screens if displayed Choose a Drawing Template in versions 4 5 5 0 or Welcome to Microsoft Visio in Visio 2000 108 Open the saved file form the File gt Open menu option 109 VDX format Select the Enable Macros button when asked whether to enable macros If you are given a dialog about XML warnings click OK to continue 110 CSV format A Vi
274. sh QGraphcoord raphcoord mpls fish graphcoordaux raphcoordaux mpls fish group nane hewdemand hone owner site hone tunnel unnel mpls fish Traffic Files egress ingress none none none Figure 5 1 Spec File Read Files 2 Click on the Network Files tab and search for the file you want to update Note that you cannot change the spec or dparam file in this way Some network files may also be grayed out 3 Click on the Filter not modifiable button to view only the files that can be updated through this window Note The muxloc file is not modifiable in this window The muxloc file should be specified before loading the spec file It may be done using the File Manager To edit the spec file in the File Manager select the spec file right click over it and select either Modify Spec or Modify Spec in Notepad 4 Click on the row containing the file type you want to import Click Browse to locate the file you wish to import from the File Chooser window and then click Select after you have selected the file to import 5 Click the Load button amp to read the file 6 If there are errors your file is probably not according to the WANDL file format Please refer to File Format Guide to correct any errors The file will still be entered into the spec file But you may be asked if you want to continue to read the file 5 2 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS The to
275. sible reason might be 1 Revision repository was not created before Click the button to create it 2 File reading problem due to permission or 3 Connection problem to the server Revision manager is ready Figure 21 2 Initial Revision Manager window 2 Click on Create Try Again to begin using the Revision Manager for a network model for the first time Once it is launched it will display all WANDL input files for this network on the left panel 3 Double click on the bblink filename on the left panel of the window to open the folder Click on any file version e g 1 1 current to view the details of that version on the right hand side 4 Click on any row in the table on the right hand side of the window to view the context of that line as shown on the bottom right section In the example below version 1 1 of the bblink hpnni file is shown with the link between B 1 1 and B 1 2 selected Revision Manager NPAT WANDL file Revision KE bblink hpnni r1 1 C bblinkhpnni Link Name Interface A Interface Z 11 BIE i current J demand hpnni I demandhpnni Aggregated J dparam hpnni J hpnni hpnni C muxloc hpnni C nodeparam hpnni Total 62 item s BNE Biles DEF 1 STM1 Last updated July 9 2002 10 38 49 AM EDT Figure 21 3 Revision Manager window with bblink hpnni r1 1 selected 5 Go back to your main window and switch to Modify mode Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc
276. sio File Converter window pops up Accept the defaults it offers by pressing OK If you are given a dialog box asking if you wish to enable macros or not select the Enable Macros button You should see the map being loaded into Visio Comment 18 OC3 cost 187730 Thu Oct 13 00 20 27 EDT 2005 dsj ay Figure 6 37 Example Visio Outpu 6 26 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS PAGE SETUP 111 Depending upon the page setup mode you chose landscape or portrait you may need to change the Visio settings from portrait to landscape or vice versa as shown in Figure 6 38 Version Instructions to change setup mode to Landscape Visio 4 5 Go to Edit gt Drawing Page gt Size amp Scale and choose Landscape Visio 5 0 Make changes under File gt Page Setup Then press the button Print Setup that this window contains and make further changes Visio 2000 Go to File gt Page Setup and choose Landscape in both the Page Size tab and the Print Setup tab Visio 2002 No changes necessary Visio 2003 No changes necessary SETTING LINK COLORS AND CURVATURE For the VDX format the link colors and curvature should be automatic However for the CSV file format the links in the map will be displayed as black straight lines To give them the correct colors and curvature go to Visio s Tools menu and choose the following items in succession Macros gt WANDL gt LinkColorsAndCurvature See
277. t oo export home wandl tmp hw inventory out CARD_LIST IE csv View in Excel Equipment Cost Table Log export home wandl tmp hw inventory out EQUIPCOSTREPORT admin log csv View in Excel gt Equipment Cost Report quip p Figure 13 2 Equipment Cost Report Uploading is a three step process 1 Upload Table from Client Uploading the CSV file from the client e g PC to the application server 2 Add Table from Server This feature will add up an entry in the list of cost tables 3 Select cost table from the server The cost table list is updated once a report is generated In this case closing the client and re opening it will update the list of cost tables Deliveries and Reporting COST REPORTS Once the input cost tables are selected a detailed report is issued per category equipment link or site The list of columns can be configured via Configure Column The Report can be filtered out by using the Search tab at the bottom Use Restore button to go back to the entire list Each column can be sorted out by clicking on the header The last column called Monthly difference is the number of months left for which the equipment is to be depreciated FLOW COST REPORT This is the final report that provides for each demand in the traffic matrix the detailed costing It is located at the bottom of the screen The demand file can be viewed by clicking on Demand file The Flow cost report includes the cost per item for each flow
278. t ance tein Figure 20 9 Traffic Generation Wizard Specify Individual Demand Properties 10 The final steps is to assign a name to the traffic profile The options to generate a demand file based on the current traffic profile and to load the generated demand file are also available Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 20 7 ADVANCED TRAFFIC GENERATION E Traffic Generation Wizard Step 3 Save and finish Specity a traffic profile name Give this traffic profile name Mame TrafficProfile_01 The wizard can automatically generate this traffic profile s demand file and load it into the current network C Generate Demand File LI Load Demand File current demands will be overwritten lt Back Finish cancel Hem Figure 20 10 Traffic Generation Wizard Traffic Profile Name and Final Options 11 After creating several traffic profiles the Traffic Generation window will be populated with the created traffic profiles An example is shown below Traffic Generation Marne _ int Trafic Type service TypeiFrofile el VPN Double Traffic 100 l amp tEw User Defined General 200 GB 200g bit s UU eer Defined General1000 Flows 1000 demand s UserDefned h stp Options Demand Options SourcerDestination Setup Options YPM Double Trafic Full Duplex All Add traffic between all source destination pairs Co A Add traffic only between pairs
279. t AW Gain values since the latter two values are calculated for each demand assuming that there are no other demands in the network When the existing demands are taken into account the Best AW and Best AW Gain values cannot always be achieved Thus the best possible realistic admin weight and admin weight gains are displayed in the New AW and AW Gain columns oo Net Groom Mame ckt00266 cktooog94 ckt00133 ckt00152 ckt001 20 ckt00028 ckt00296 ckt00113 ckt0o294 cktOO1 70 cktOO1 F1 ckHOO274 ckt0027s ckHO0093 ckHOO092 ckHOOZ40 ckHO00233 ckHOO2324 ckHOOO 70 Mode A SORA ACMILAR ANJAR CRITIAS AIR RIVENDELL STELLYIA TIMAELS STELLYIA FAN ARKER ZANARKER GARNET GARNET ACMILAR ACMILAR ATLAS LILLIP LIT LILLIP LIT PLATO Mode lt By CARPEDIEM 429 1 90K FRIGIDARI MU LANITA MU LANTA ARSENAL ACMILAM 2 169 439 940 103 940 923 7 60K 2 919 TEPIDARIUNA 21 4 4 70K MILILAITA MILILAITA MULANTA 190 960K 599 810 616 400K TEPIDARIUM 224 17 40K TEPIDARIUM 64 1 60K MIUILANTA 176 460K TEPIDARIUM 610 900K MU LANTA S TELLYIA 1 600 M 1 043M TEPIDARIUM 53 617 OF MU LANTA MU LANTA 147 450K 526 960K Orig Avy s500 BOO 500 BOO s500 s500 s500 BOO 400 400 500 s500 400 BOO 400 s500 400 300 s500 Best Avy Best Avy Ga 200 300 300 400 300 300 300 400 200 200 300 300 200 400 300 300 200 100 300 300 300 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
280. t Juniper support Definition of a Spec File The spec file short for specification file is the file that indicates the file locations of WANDL input files When loading a network as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project the spec file will be used to find the information needed to construct the network model Here is an example spec file Filename spec y runcode x datadir u wandl data example dparam dparam x muxloc muxloc x nodeparam nodeparam x bblink bblink x demand demand x SPEC FILE FORMAT e Each entry of the spec file is a line of the following general format lt keyword gt lt value gt e File locations should be indicated using the format lt ile type gt lt file path gt e Directory locations are indicated using the format lt directory type gt lt dir path gt RUNCODE The runcode is a user specified file extension that enables you to quickly identify the network files belonging to the same project In the above example the runcode is x and all the files have x as the file extension Choose a runcode that will help you to distinguish between different versions of a network model that you are studying For example you could distinguish three separate network design runs using the runcodes 1 2 and 3 DATADIR The datadir is the default directory where the input files are located In the above example the input files will be searched in u wandl data exampl
281. tailed information on each path placement iteration and for the option to mark paths placed using the path select feature use the path placement options under the Design menu Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the options available for path placement 1 View Path Placement options 2 Tune your path placements 3 Design path placements from scratch 4 Run diverse path design as described in Path Diversity Design on page 16 9 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 16 1 ne Definitions Tuning Current paths remain in place Only local optimization is performed Demands can be placed if there is sufficient bandwidth Design from scratch All existing paths are removed before paths are placed Demands can be placed if there is sufficient bandwidth Path Placement Method Description Sequential When there is a choice of the order in which demands are placed subject to the Placement Order in Design Options window Path Placement options pane demands are placed according to the order of demands in the demand file If there is insufficient bandwidth to place a demand the program will not attempt to reroute other demands in order to make room for it Demands are placed subject to user specified constraints Free run When there is a choice of the order in which demands are placed subject to the Placement Order in Design Options window Path Placement options pane demands are placed in
282. tch to Design mode Go to menu Design gt Backbone gt Create Simplified Group Model Info pop up window describes the actions that will happen Nodes in the group named SUPERCORE are kept as is and will not be modified One node is created for every group except the SUPERCORE group Demands tunnels and links terminating at nodes in a group are re terminated to that singular node Nodes not in the SUPERCORE group are deleted This consolidates the nodes Select Save simplified network in current directory with runcode supergroup Open the newly created spec supergroup oes Map Standard RRR RARER RR RRIARI RR ARR RRR ARR RRR RR RA EE ARRA Planned Util v 13 links cost 2443410 100 0 gt 90 0 75 0 J H 9 JD PE 2 5 ji s3 Figure 14 17 Simplified Network Topology The nodes in EAST and WEST groups no longer exist and are consolidated simply as a single EAST and WEST node The nodes in SUPERCORE group still exist Go to menu Network gt Summary The total demand BW is now 1 004G This is now different than the original 1 264G because the intra EAST and WEST demands were discarded during consolidation In Step 5 total traffic before was 1 264G minus intra EAST 78 212MB minus intra WEST 181 927MB 1 004G Optional To further verify traffic between sites you can assign the EAST WEST and other remaining nodes into the 3 separate groups and check the Group Summary report in Report Manager
283. tems are available for each site Some of them can be depreciated e g Air conditioning in this case the depreciation period and the Start Date must be filled in Or leased In this case the List price Overhead is used to calculate the monthly fees e g Building Insurance e Start date Start of the depreciation period Depreciated costs are calculated using the following formula List price 1 Discount Depreciation period e List price Either the Capex of the cost item or it is used to calculate the leased cost e Overhead Percentage is added on top of the monthly depreciated cost It can also be used to calculate the leased cost Example based on the sample table Monthly costs for Air Conditioning are depreciated cost 1 Overhead 160 000 50 80 1 50 Monthly costs for Building Insurance are 2 000 100 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 13 5 ae How to Upload the Cost Tables The equipment cost tables is initialized from the Equipment Cost Report menu Network View Configuration Management Fault Management Performance Management Admin Reports Web Client KS Main Menu gt Network Reports gt export home wandl tmp spec lE gt Network Costing Reports rated Network Data Equipment Cost Report Equipment Cost Tables Add table from Server Upload from Client Select Remove View in Excel Router List Report export home wandl tmp hw inventory out ROUTER_LIST IE csv View in Excel Line Card Repor
284. ter dog If you do not have the appropriate password to open this file please refer to Following Along with the Examples in this Manual on page I 1 Note that reults may vary depending upon the device hardware Related Documentation For a detailed description of the Simulation windows refer to the General Reference Guide for The Simulation Menu chapter and failure simulation options in the The Application Menu chapter Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the simulation process and the associated recommended procedures 1 Perform interactive simulations fail links nodes and facilities as described in Interactive Simulation on page 15 4 2 Try a failure simulation script exhaustive single or double node failure and link failure and survey the script options as described in Simulation Scenarios on page 15 8 3 Analyze failure simulation reports as described in Simulation Reports on page 15 11 4 View simulation results graphically on the map as described in Viewing Simulation Results Graphically on page 15 14 Detailed Procedures 15 2 1 Open spec dog For more help see Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project 2 Switch to simulation mode by clicking on the Simulation button underneath the File and Application menus as shown in Figure 15 1 E gt View I Design Simulation Modify Figure 15 1 Switching to Simulation Mode 3 The Simulati
285. that using a different hardware model may affect the routing and therefore the results you get may be different than that obtained for the router hardware used in this example 1 View basic network information 2 Open the View Nodes window and specify search criteria to filter nodes that meet a particular criteria as described in step 3 on page 7 3 View basic node and link information via the map popup menus as described in step 11 on page 7 4 4 Save a report of the link information as described in step 22 on page 7 6 and view the report from the File Manager as described in step 23 on page 7 6 5 Access demand information for the link using a button in the link window as described in step 24 on page 7 6 6 Try various options in the demand window including filtration of demands going through the link and the Show Path BW Ovhd Details and Show Traffic options as described in step 29 on page 7 8 Save Console messages as described in step 30 on page 7 8 7 Check if sufficient bandwidth exists in the network to place additional user demands between two nodes and view the path between two nodes as described in step 32 on page 7 9 Also survey the other Capacity options as described in step 38 on page 7 10 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 7 1 VIEWING AND SAVING NETWORK INFORMATION 8 View aggregated demand information as described in step 39 on page 7 11 Detailed Procedures 1 Click on the Net
286. the Modify menu Modify all demands of bandwidth 750K at node N1 using the Modify menu Delete a link using a link s right click menu on the topology map Delete three unplaced demands Save the design environment yw eS SY SS Learn how to edit the demand type field and to configure a demand route and a backup path This will not require use of the triangle3 example Note that this does not apply for routers However for routers if you have a license to use the tunnel features you can configure a tunnel route and backup tunnel in a similar manner Detailed Procedures 1 Open the spec triangle3 network that was created in Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands or open another network with existing network elements 2 To switch to modify mode click on the Modify button in the action mode toolbar as shown in Figure 9 1 The Modify pull down menu gets activated 2 ro view ik Design 2 Stmuation SNM Figure 9 1 Switching to Modify Mode Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 9 1 Modifying Nodes 3 Select Nodes from the Modify pull down menu This will bring up a window with a list of all nodes in the network Network Info Network Nodes Neon ID Name Hardware NPA NOC Lata Country IP_Address rl NI Nodet MUX 1732 271 224 US rary N2 Node2 he a 88 Aa N3 Node3 MUX 773 223 358 Summary Location Country US NPANXX Lata 732271 224 Demands Lat Lon 40 57 74 532 VH H 5081
287. the cost assigned will be 250 On the other hand if the vendor ATT is listed as the vendor as opposed to DEF the cost of that link is calculated as 300 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 12 5 Be 12 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc NETWORK COST ALLOCATION software This feature relies on a detailed network cost calculation taking into account Capex e g line card and Opex items e g maintenance fees Network cost allocation calculates the cost per IP flow or demand that are transported on top of a shared infrastructure The cost reports include the following items for which either Capex or via Opex can be inputted T his chapter describes the network cost allocation feature at the flow and demand level of the WANDL 1 Chassis cost 2 Line card cost 3 Site cost 4 Link cost Equipment costs Chassis and Line Cards are calculated based on the demand routing paths the routing path is used to determine the various network elements site router card link that are shared by the demands The costs for these network elements are distributed according to the flow bandwidth in other words the weight is the flow bandwidth For instance the monthly depreciated cost of a router card will be allocated against the various flows using this specific card Prerequisites 1 You should have started up the WANDL software and opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project 2
288. the cursor to select a point outside the center to indicate the desired radius of the circle of points The points will be arranged at the circumference of a circle as shown in Figure 6 13 below aia AL AN E h Figure 6 13 Circle Nodes STRAIGHTEN NODES This feature is like Circle Nodes but puts the selected points onto a horizontal line equally spaced 35 Select multiple nodes to arrange into a line Once the nodes are highlighted on the map select Straighten Nodes from the right click menu and you will see the nodes lined up RESET BY LAT LON Reset by Lat Lon can be used to redraw the map based on geographical latitude and longitude coordinates The Lat Lon is set on the Node window s Location tab as described in Chapter 9 Modifying Nodes Links and Demands Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Node and Link Selection and Node Rearrangement GRAPHICAL VS GEOGRAPHICAL COORDINATES You can easily select and move nodes on the map Note that while this will change the graphical coordinates of the nodes the geographical coordinates will remain unchanged You can later reset the graphical coordinates of the node back to the geographical coordinates from the right click popup s Layout gt Reset By Lat Lon menu as described in Topology Layout on page 6 10 Otherwise if you actually want to change the geographical coordinates according to these manual node rearr
289. the files found Afterwards when you look at the other tabs you will notice they are pre populated according to the input files Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 4 5 a ne Editing a Spec File After you have created your spec file you can go back to edit the spec file by right clicking on the spec file from the File Manager window and selecting Spec File gt Modify Spec In this tutorial we will edit the spec ex1 file created from scratch previously in Creating a Spec File on page 4 2 and specify a muxloc node specification file for it 22 Choose File gt Open File Manager 23 Navigate to the folder previous created e g u wandl data examplel 24 Right click on spec ex1 and select Spec File gt Modify Spec from the popup menu 25 Select the Design Parameters tab The hardware type is initially greyed out If you need to change the hardware type you can reset the dparam file by clicking Reset Dparam File This will enable the hardware vendor selection Note that it will also overwrite the previous dparam file 26 Click on the Network Files tab and click on the row corresponding to the muxloc file type Click the Browse button to navigate to the u wandl sample IP fish directory highlight the muxloc mpls fish file and then click Select 27 Click the Set button with the blue arrow icon on it Note that if you are planning to specify several input files e g muxloc bblink dparam from the same folder yo
290. ther Modes t Hg Add modit e Delete Show Fath Highlight All Close Figure 8 10 Demands window in Modify mode 26 Click the Add button to open the Add Demand window and add a single demand as shown in Figure 8 11 8 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ADDING NODES LINKS AND DEMANDS Properties Location UserParameters Demand ID Ord N1_to_N2 ee NONE NodeA nt YSN Zi Bw lim coy gt za PrPre p2 Types E fo semite MONE v CI Path Req Path Config Options Ls Fe routable ni Miscellaneous Comment Demands Paths for this demand To choose paths Click linksfnodes on map then rightclick in table a _Pathname Opt Configured Route Add Row Delete Row Path Table Show Route Show All Paths Add Clase Hem Figure 8 11 Add Demand Window 27 For Demand ID i e the identifier for the flow or circuit type in Dmd N1 to N2 Then select N1 from the Node A Origin drop down menu and N2 from the Node Z Destination drop down menu For BW bandwidth put in 1M for 1Mbps for the A to Z direction only and for pri pre put in 2 2 Leave default settings for the rest of the items Click Add to add the demand A pop up note will notify you that the demand has been added A temporary yellow line will be drawn between N1 and N2 Close the Add Demand window and the Demands window 28 To see the eff
291. there are very small utilizations e g less than 0 4 and more granularity is needed than allowed at the default zoom level Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Customizing Nodes and Links in the Legends 10 Note that there are other legends that you can use to get an understanding of your network Select the map drop down menu There are four submenus Filters Network Elements Utilization Legends and Subviews ow Wap Standard Planned Util Filters k D Network Elements D Utilization Legends k D Subviews b Figure 6 5 Map Drop Down Menu 11 Select Subviews gt Type from the drop down to see the different types of nodes and links in your network 3 BROCADE CISCO 6B JUNIPER a Groups Discs Ge Le R SI SI S OC3 Show all Nonel R Filter Summary Nodes 14 14 Pseudo nodes 0 0 Groups 0 0 Links 18 18 E w y Cl p P g Figure 6 6 Legend Node Types Legend 12 Select the drop down menu a second time and notice that the Subviews submenu is now shown with the selected radio button on its left and the items underneath it are provided as a shortcut to other menu items in the same category To view other information like the vendor and media information click on the relevant item from the list 13 Note that each legend has its own color settings Some legends like Planned Util change link colors but
292. tions Click OK when done Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 11 9 ees Viewing Link Rules Integrity Check Report 23 In View mode select Report gt Report Manager and select the Link Rules Integrity Check Report The results will be displayed as shown in Figure 11 12 Report Manager CI Reports linkrules format 11 10 Path amp Diversity Report Equal Cost Multi Path F G CoS Demands Report C Provisioned Utilization Link Peak Utilization Re C Link Partition Report L CoS Links Report Cy Link Cost Report Link Usage Cost Repo C Demand Cost C Area BGP Report C 1818 Report FJ Interface Traffic Reports Reports From Import EJ VPN C Voice Demand Statistics Rep C Group Link Rules Integrity Che om El Explanation Print LinkName ErrorMessage LinkRuleDescription LINKS rulet s_ Link does not match the templ links between cisco and juniper nodes should foll LINK6 rule1 Link does not match the templ links between cisco and juniper nodes should foll LINK 4 rule Link should not exist parameter of orange should not connect to para LINK3 rule Link does not match the templ links between cisco and juniper nodes should foll LINK rule Link does not match the templ links between cisco and juniper nodes should foll LINK2 jrule1 Link does not match the templ links between cisco and juniper
293. tive order Tip 2 You can use the Network feature to select all nodes meeting a particular search criterion and then use the Group Selected option from the above menu Note You can create groups within groups However if you try to group two items that do not originally share a common group they will be taken out to form their own group 69 Note that the expanding and collapsing a group are very different from grouping and ungrouping Grouping establishes which nodes are in which groups and ungrouping is used to undo a grouping Meanwhile expanding a group does not change the group arrangement but displays what is inside a group Similarly collapsing a group does not change the group arrangement but hides what is inside a group Notes e You can double click on a group in the Network Elements gt Nodes view in the pull down menu of the left panel of the Topology window to expand or collapse them Or you can click on the hinge to the left of the group name If a group is collapsed double clicking its icon on the map will expand it e To collapse a single group you must use the Nodes list and double click on the group name or click once on the hinge to the left of the group name which you wish to collapse e Note also that if you select and right click on only a subset of points of a group another menu option Collapse Containing Group will appear in the Grouping menu 70 AutoGroup enables you to group by special properties
294. to Visio 6 25 Setting Up the Stencils for Visio 2002 and earlier only 6 26 Opening the Visio Drawing 6 26 Page Setup 6 27 Setting Link Colors and Curvature 6 27 Handling Groups 6 28 Visio Tips 6 29 Scalable Vector Graphics 6 30 7 Viewing and Saving Network Information 7 1 When to use 7 1 Prerequisites 7 1 Related Documentation 7 1 Recommended Instructions 7 1 Detailed Procedures 7 2 Node Link and Demand Queries 7 3 Simple Filter 7 4 Advanced Filter 7 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Contents 3 Node Link and Demand Map Popup Menus 7 4 Saving Node Link and Demand Information to a Report 7 6 Obtaining and Saving Network Information in the Console 7 8 Performing a Path Analysis 7 9 Viewing Aggregate Demand Information 7 11 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands 8 1 When to use 8 1 Prerequisites 8 1 Related Documentation 8 1 Recommended Instructions 8 1 Detailed Procedures 8 2 Adding a Node 8 2 Viewing Node Labels on Map 8 4 Adding a Link 8 4 Adding Demands 8 6 Appendix A Sample Files 8 10 spec triangle3 8 10 dparam triangle3 8 10 muxloc triangle3 8 10 bblink triangle3 8 10 demand triangle3 8 10 graphcoord triangle3 8 11 nodeparam triangle3 8 11 Appendix B Deriving npa nxx from CLLI codes using wanpricer Appendix C Customizing the Location Database 8 12 Adding a Country 8 12 Creating a City Database fora Country 8 12 9 Modifying Nodes Links and Demands 9 1 When to use 9 1 Prerequisites 9 1
295. to WANDL input files In addition to the above description the tool s functionality also includes viewing previous versions of a file checking in new versions of a file side by side comparison of two files in different versions and saving the differences in a text file on the client machine The file comparison tools are optional features that each require a separate licensing key Please contact Juniper to find out the licensing information for these features When to use Use the file comparison tools when you want to compare and view the changes made to a network s input files And use the enhanced version when you want to manage revisions of your network files Prerequisites Prior to beginning this task you should have started up the WANDL software and opened a spec file as described in Chapter 3 Opening and Closing a Network Project You should know how to add and modify your network as explained in Chapter 8 Adding Nodes Links and Demands and Chapter 9 Modifying Nodes Links and Demands Related Documentation For an overview of the WANDL software or for a detailed description of each feature and the use of each WANDL client window refer to the General Reference Guide Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the functionalities in the file comparison tools FILE COMPARISON 1 Launch the File Comparison tool via the Tools menu 2 View the details of a file REVISION MANAGER 1
296. to the total weights of the source and destination lists The exact formula used is the following BW sd BW total Ws Ws total Wd Wd total Where e BW sd Bandwidth between a specific source node and destination node e BW total Total bandwidth assigned to the traffic profile Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 20 1 Sees Ws Weight of the source node Ws total Sum of all the weights of all the source nodes Wd Weight of the destination node Wd_total Sum of all the weights of all the destination nodes Recommended Instructions 1 2 3 Detailed Procedures Open the Traffic gt Demand Generation gt General window to display a list of existing traffic profiles Add a new traffic profile using the Traffic Generation Wizard Generate a demand file based on existing traffic profiles and load it into the network Note that this feature is activated by a special password in your license file Please contact your Juniper representative for more details on this feature Traffic generation involves the creation and use of traffic profiles Traffic profiles by themselves do not have any impact on the network but are used to generate demand files which can then be read into the network This gives the user the flexibility to have several traffic profiles defined for a network and the ability to selectively generate demand files based on one or more traffic profiles as the situation dictates TRAFF
297. ton There is also a Redo Moved Node s function available if the user decides to redo the original move The map remembers up to 10 last snapshots 49 Highlight one node or a group of nodes on the topology map Click on any of the highlighted nodes hold and drag to move the nodes to a new location 50 Repeat the previous step and move the nodes to another new location 51 Click on the Undo Move Node s icon in the map toolbar Notice that the nodes will move back to the last location Click the button again to move the nodes back to its original spot 52 To move the nodes to its first moved location click the Redo Move Node s icon in the toolbar If desired click the button again to bring the nodes to its final moved location w Figure 6 17 Undo and Redo Moved Nodes Icons Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 13 i Using the Drag Rotate Tool Sometimes you may want to resize one group of nodes relative to another The drag and rotate tool allows the user to choose some nodes or collapsed groups and then stretch or shrink them enlarge or decrease their area move them 6 14 or rotate them 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Click on the icon with a green rectangle with eight little square handles together and a circulating arrow in the center Your cursor will then become a crosshair on the topology map Drag the crosshair to select the nodes you wish to move by clicking from the top left corner to t
298. tor then attempts to find new routes for the demands it has disconnected If more than one choice is available the path with the shortest distance is selected To simulate unpredictable timing effects disconnected demands with the same priority are placed in varying order in simulation runs If a demand has a pre assigned path associated with it the stmulation always tries to use the pre assigned path before searching for other paths Network nodes and links can be brought up or down sequentially in order to study the impact on path placements Information such as link utilization demand failures and network failures can be accessed easily using the interactive graphics interface When to use The simulation mode is used to initiate various failure scenarios once a backbone topology has reached a steady state Simulations may be performed on both new and existing designs to determine resiliency in the backbone Many hypothetical What if situations can be simulated using network failure simulation Examples include single line failure link failure node failure multiple element failure random daily failure and a user defined sequence of events Using the random daily failure simulation the program can randomly bring down a given number of links daily for a set number of days Extreme failure scenarios such as the outage of an entire carrier at a given number of sites can be studied In the interactive mode you can activate and deactivate nod
299. tpri 23 Open the original spec uk network project again Go to Tools gt Options gt Design and make sure the Backbone Type is set to E1 and the Node Weight is set to 200 In the Design gt Diversity options pane set the values to those pictured in Figure 14 7 Click OK to close the design options window 24 In Design mode select Design gt Reset Clear Links Then select Design gt Backbone Design to repeat the basic or standard design that was performed in Green field Design on page 14 5 Next perform the diversity design by selecting Design gt Backbone Diversity Design 25 The console message says Design El backbone using the following circuit criteria priority gt 10 must survive any link site failure priority gt 10 must survive any link failure Media diversity checked Maxhop 8 Start Diversity Design sitedvpri 10 linkdvpri 10 9 Els Total Link Cost 24 926BP Average Cost Mile 18 96BP Assigned Cost Hop 1137 36BP Add 6 link s for Diversity Checking 15 Els Total Link Cost 50 355BP Time for Diversity Design Os Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 11 14 12 DESIGN Removing redundant links All links are being checked Redundancy of 15 links will be checked Completed Deleted 6 Pass site amp link diversity check 9 Els Total Link Cost 30 878BEP Time for Diversity Design Tuning 2s 9 Els Total Link Cost
300. tude coordinates are available or latitude and longitude are both zero this option seeks to layout the nodes clearly so they are not all located at the same point When latitude longitude coordinates are available they are used to locate the point DISTRIBUTE SELECTED POINTS For distributing selected points you must first select the points that you would like to distribute as in step 36 to step 40 before clicking on Distrib Selected Points Once you click on Distrib Selected Points a cursor appears Click where you want the center around which the points will be distributed to be Then click a certain distance away from that center point to indicate the desired radius of the distribution The points will then be distributed If the picture is not correctly displayed i e network elements are missing select Refresh on the topology map right click menu When Animate Distribute Points is selected in the Map Preferences window obtained from Tools gt Options gt Map Preferences the network layout is rearranged with animation This checkbox is unchecked default because the animation process consumes a great deal of time and slows down the process CIRCLE NODES To arrange a set of points in a circle first select those points so that they are highlighted Then open the Layout menu of the Right Click Menu and select Circle Nodes Using the cursor first select the desired center of the circle of points Then use
301. ture requiring a separate license Please contact your Juniper representative for more information The following are the instructions to convert CLLI codes to npa nxx 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Create a file with the list of CLLI codes one entry per line Next run the program u wandl bin wanpricer Answer n when asked to read create a spec file Then select the following menu options From the WANPricer Main Menu select D Domestic U S Tariff amp POP Homing From the Domestic U S Tariff amp POP Homing Menu menu select 1 Database Information From the Database Information menu select 6 VH LL CLLI to NPA Conversion From the VH LL CLLI to NPA Conversion Menu select 5 CLLI to NPANXX File Conversion Next enter the file name in which to save the results Press enter or quit until you get out of the program The resulting file has a npa nxx listed for each CLLI code which can be specified in the muxloc file with the following format NodeID Name npa nxx Note that the NodeID should match with the NodeID used in the rest of the network project When loading up the network the npa nxx will be used to position the nodes in the right location Upon loading the network with this updated npa nxx information verify that the nodes are in the correct locations Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 8 11 Appendix C Customizing the Location Database 8 12 If a country or city is missin
302. type will be assigned the corresponding vendor offering the least cost The format of the usercost file is as follows rom to vendor type cost N01 N02 ATT TI 1000 00 N01 N02 ATT FT56K 300 00 NOT N02 WTG FT56K 290 00 NO3 N04 USS T1 site2 site3 USS TL 2000 00 N05 site3 USS TI 2000 00 N05 site3 ATT PI 2200 00 Note that the from and to fields can be specified as nodeID node name or site name and all fields are separated by spaces or tabs If a site name is entered the assignment applies to all locations in that site Site names should be different from node names The cost field is optional and it is a recurring cost In the absence of the cost field the program will have to look for cost information elsewhere e g the standard tariff database If a link has the same from to vendor and trunk type as listed above the corresponding cost applies For example in the above file for any T1 between N1 and N2 with the vendor ATT the corresponding recurring cost will be 1000 00 As mentioned earlier this information can be overridden by cost information in the bblink file In some cases more than one vendor is assigned to the same trunk type for the same node pair In that case when the vendor in the bblink is specified as DEF for default the entry with the least cost vendor is treated as the default vendor and its cost will be used For example in the above file if an FT56K link between N1 and N2 is assigned the default vendor
303. u can first set an absolute path for the datadir in the General tab and then specify relative file path names for the input files If at any point you wish to erase a file path that you have entered click on the broom icon This will set the field to none 28 When you have made all the desired specifications click OK to get the Specfile Status window 29 Check for any errors in the Status column If it is okay click Load Network to load the network 30 You can click Yes when the dialog box asks if you wish to overwrite the current spec file Alternatively you can click No in the dialog box click Back in the Specfile Status window change the spec file and runcode to something different and then proceed as before to avoid overwriting the current spec file This will preserve the original spec file 31 Note that when the network is finally loaded the nodes will appear on the map if the network file you specified was muxloc mpls fish Creating or Editing a Network File via the Text Editor 4 6 This example will use file editing and file creation via the text editor to add a network file 32 Use the previous spec ex1 from the last section Navigate to the spec file s containing folder if you are not already there 33 Create a network file using WANDL file format This can be done from the File Manager Right click over the lower right pane of the File Manager in the same directory that contai
304. ugh failed nodes 42 bw 193 623M Demand that failed to be rerouted 0 bw 0 14 Select Reset Simulation to restore all devices taken down into operation Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 15 5 SIMULATION 15 Interactive SRLG Facility Failure 15 The Simulation gt Interactive Scenarios SRLG Facility tab works similarly An SRLG or shared risk link group is a group of links likely to fail together in the event of a failure A facility is a group of links and or nodes that are likely to fail together in the event of a failure This option can be used in failure simulations where one wants to fail elements in such a group simultaneously One example is to group a set of links that go through the same fiber into a facility so that when the fiber is cut the links in that facility are failed together Alternatively one may want to group together the links that go through a particular card 16 To create a facility switch the action mode to Modify and select Modify gt Elements gt SRLG Facilities In the subsequent Facilities window click Add which will open the Add Facility window Select both LINK15A and LINK15B from the link table on the right Specify a facility name such as facility15 Click OK The facility is added in the Facilities window Click Close to close the Facilities window 17 Switch back to the Simulation action mode Select Simulation gt Interactive Scenarios gt SRLG Facility for the fol
305. ulation gt Simulation Scenarios to open the following window Simulation Scenarios Single Failure Multiple Failures Report Options Advanced Options Exhaustive Failure Types wi Node i Link Li Site Li Slot Lj Card _ SRLG Facility _ Parallel Links Figure 15 9 Failure Simulation Scripts Options may vary EXHAUSTIVE SINGLE ELEMENT FAILURE SCRIPTS 27 To run an exhaustive single element failure for nodes and links check the items Node and Link The exhaustive single element failures will allow for the analysis of every single element failure of the given element type node link etc 28 Additionally select the Report Options tab The failure simulation will automatically create a peak utilization report indicating the worst utilizations for each link across all single element failures and the single element failure event that caused it To report on the event which triggered the peak utilization for all periods of the trafficload file select Include Simulation Events for all Periods in Peak Utilization Report See Interpreting the Link Peak Utilization Report on page 15 12 for more information on interpreting this report Generate Peak Group Transit Statistics LT Include Simulation Events for all Periods in Peak Link Utilization Report _ Generate Demand Over Tunnel Utilization Report _ Generate SRLG and Up Down Sequence for use in Upper Layer _ Generate Detailed Reroute Report Figure 15 10 Report O
306. uniper nodes sho ruleZ parameter2 of orange should not connectt Properties Rule Name Description Max distance between nodes SSeS Link template Figure 11 10 LinkRules Window 20 The order of the Link Rule can also be rearranged by using the Up and Down arrows The resulting order will be used to determine the precedence of the rules when performing condition matching against all the links 21 In the Link Rules window click on the Add button The Add Link Rules window will be displayed as shown in Figure 11 11 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ees 11 8 Add Link Rule mme a ea Bd Rule Name ryle2 Description larameter2 of orange should not connectto parametert of 1 o if two nodes meet the following conditions Max distance between nodes Node 4 Conditions Node Z Conditions Node A Node Z Relationship Match any Y of the following parameter2 id does not equal Y orange Delete Do the following Require links created during a design to use the template Forbid the creation of links between the nodes during a design on came men Figure 11 11 Add Link Rules Description A description of the rule which will be shown in the Link Rules Integrity Check Report Max distance between Specify the maximum distance allowed followed by mi or km If no unit is specified the default is the unit specified in Report Options Node
307. untry checkbox to specify location by city and country Select US UNITED_STATES from the Country drop down menu Then type in Chicago in the City textbox and click Search It will come up with a selection of cities that include the name Chicago Select the one that says CHICAGO IL Click on Add The node gets added to the city you specified Note If the city you want to enter in does not exist refer to Appendix C Customizing the Location Database of this chapter for details on how to add locations to the database If you have the CLLI codes and want to convert them to npa nxx refer to Appendix B Deriving npa nxx from CLLI codes using wanpricer Note The node ID for an added node must be unique On the other hand the node name need not be unique Suppose at some point you made a mistake in the node properties and already added a previous node with the node ID that you wanted for the current node You will not be able to add another node with that same node ID However you can modify nodes by closing the Add Node window highlighting the entry for the node you wish to modify from the Nodes window and clicking the Modify button For now simply click Delete to free up the node ID so you can practice adding from the Add Node window Refer to Chapter 9 Modifying Nodes Links and Demands for more on modifying network properties 9 Click on Close to close the Add Node window Tip You can mak
308. ure curved Aspect Ratio The aspect ratio width height should be about the same in the Visio drawing as in the map or the image will be distorted For instance do not export in portrait mode when the map is wider than it Is tall resize the map first by dragging its borders Editing the Stencil CSV format Make global changes to the drawing by editing the stencil WandlStencil vss For instance to turn all the diamonds into discs just edit the master diamond in the stencil then re open the csv file Or replace the master with one of the many symbols in Visio s Network Diagram stencils Editing the csv file CSV format Consider editing the csv file if you want to change a node s hardware type The format of the csv files is specified in Visio s online help files search on importing text and text import record types As always use caution when editing a computer generated file Handling Dotted The Export to Visio feature supports dotted line styles as long Lines as the dotted line is limited to one color Solid lines can be exported in up to two colors e g to show the utilization in both directions on a link However it is not possible to export a link in two colors to show the utilization and have it be dotted at the same time Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 6 29 i Scalable Vector Graphics 6 30 Scalable Vector Gaphics SVG is an open standards XML based vector graphics language SVG fil
309. ures 15 2 Interactive Simulation 15 4 Interactive Link Failure 15 4 Interactive Node Failure 15 5 Interactive SRLG Facility Failure 15 6 Stepping Through a Simulation 15 6 View Changes 15 7 Simulation Scenarios 15 8 Exhaustive Single Element Failure Scripts 15 8 Exhaustive Double and Triple Element Failures 15 9 Simulation Reports 15 11 Interpreting the Link Peak Utilization Report 15 12 Generating One Report Per Failure 15 13 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc Viewing Simulation Results Graphically 15 14 Exhaustive Failure Simulation 15 14 Interactive Failure Simulation 15 14 16 Path Placement 16 1 When to use 16 1 Prerequisites 16 1 Related Documentation 16 1 Recommended Instructions 16 1 Definitions 16 2 Detailed Procedures 16 3 Routing Method 16 3 Placement Order 16 3 Path Selection Method 16 3 Peak Rate Requirement 16 3 Simulating Path Placement 16 4 Tuning 16 4 Non Interactive Mode 16 4 Interactive Mode 16 4 Tuning Sequential Path Placement Method 16 5 Free run Path Placement Method 16 6 Design from Scratch 16 7 Non Interactive Mode 16 7 Interactive Mode 16 7 Steps to Take After Tuning or Designing from Scratch 16 7 Preferred Required Path Setting 16 7 Saving Path Placement Information 16 8 Path Comparison 16 8 Reset Paths to Routing in Demand File 16 8 Network Grooming 16 9 Path Diversity Design 16 9 17 Route Optimization 17 1 When to use 17 1 Related Documentation 17 1 Recommended
310. utton ri Figure 1 4 Maximize Window Button Ex Figure 1 5 Exit Window Button Moving a Window You can move a window by pressing your mouse down when your pointer is on a window s top border Keep your mouse s left button pressed down and drag the selected window to the place of your choice When you are satisfied release the mouse button For Further Information For detailed information on using the the WANDL software windows refer to the subsequent chapters in this document and to the General Reference Guide Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 1 3 eee 1 4 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc WHAT IS A SPEC FILE n this chapter you will learn what a spec file is and how it is used to organize the network files that make up each WANDL network project To import router configuration files to automatically create a spec file see the Router Guide chapter Router Data Extraction For information on how to create a paper model through the WANDL client please refer to Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model Prerequisites You should have your server and client up and running as described in the Getting Started Guide Related Documentation For a more in depth look at the input file formats refer to the File Format Guide For extraction utilities that can automatically create the spec file from network raw outputs such as config files refer to the hardware specific guide or contac
311. ve not yet created your own spec file you can open one of the existing spec files located in the WANDL sample directory If you wish to create your own spec file see Chapter 4 Creating amp Editing a Network Model You should have already logged into the WANDL client as described in the Getting Started Guide Related Documentation For an overview of the File Manager you can also refer to the General Reference Guide Recommended Instructions Following is a high level sequential outline of the process used to open a spec file and the associated recommended procedures 1 Open a spec file as described in Open Network Project File on page 3 1 2 Close a spec file as described in Close Network Project File on page 3 3 3 Re open a spec file as described in Accessing Recently Opened Project Files on page 3 4 Detailed Procedures Open Network Project File 1 Use the File Manager window to navigate to the directory where the network project file spec file is located Filtering Tip To view only files that are spec files you can select Spec Files from the Files of Type drop down menu in the File Manager Or in the same field type in a filter string e g spec and press lt Enter gt To restore the original file listing remember to either choose All Files from the Files of Type drop down menu or clear this field and press lt Enter gt Navigation Tip There are multiple ways to navigate To go directly to a
312. ve the currently selected topology window to a file of one of the following types PNG JPEG EPS PCL PDF PS SVG Visio VDX for 2003 and CSV for earlier Visio versions Export Map Title Ol Comment Legends Date and Time File Marne Imyfishhetwork Files of Type Portable Network Graphics PMG a ae Figure 6 33 Export Map Window Portable Network Graphics PMG A Jo int Photc grap ahir E 5 LiFOUD Jr Ela Encapsulated PostScript EPS HP Page Control Language Version 5 PCL Adobe Acrobat Portable Document File POF Adobe PostScript Level 2 PS scalable Vector Graphics Sy Visio 2003 and later VOX Visio 2002 and earlier CSV Figure 6 34 Available File Types Note Both the Print and Export options can produce postscript files The latter option produces Adobe PostScript Level 2 which may not be supported by old versions of postscript readers For the former the PostScript Level may be dependent upon the printer selection 97 Select the folder in your client machine from the Save In pull down menu that you want to save your file to or click on the Create New Folder icon to the right of the Home icon to create a folder 98 Select the file type from the Files of Type drop down box and type the name of the file you want to save to where it says File Name 99 Different options will be enabled in the Show in Output section depending on the file type For the first six options onl
313. w will appear that will list any existing admin weights Click on the Add button a Protocol HW Typet Hlevel1 HW Type2 Hlevel2 Trunk Same Site Fixed Weight Variable Weight er Admin Weights Facilities J Multicast Group 5 OSPF Areas CA owners lt Routing Instances Ba Service Profiles Properties Service Types gites Nodes ad Add Mod Figure 10 7 Admin Weight Window 18 The Add Admin Weight window will appear as shown in Figure 10 8 Note that options within this window may vary depending on your password license or hardware model Select the protocol for the type of link you wish to set e g PNNI AdminWeight OSPF Specify the type of trunk e g E1 OC3 T2 the hardware type of the node A and node Z e g NODE ACCESS CISCO JUNIPER the hierarchy level of node A and node Z CORE REGULAR ACCESS and whether the weight is for links connecting nodes in the same site INTER Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc MODIFYING SITES OWNERS ETC INTRA EXTRA Specify a fixed weight and a variable weight Specific models have an additional option to specify if nodes are in the Same Peer Group Add Admin Weight Protocol ADMINVVEIGHT Trunk loca Hi Typed aLL A Hi Typez ALL Hlevell CORE Hlevel CORE v Same Site Dont Care Fixed Weight 200 Variable Weight aon Figure 10 8 Add Admin Weight Window 19 When all th
314. will be in the type field of the demand If you designed for secondary paths the information is displayed in the same entry as the primary path The Secondary field will give the pathname of the new path However AUTO Design may not create a path name for you In that case click on the Details button for a demand Your secondary path will be listed in the demands paths associated with the demand If you enter a path name in modify mode Modify gt Elements gt Demands the name will be displayed under the Secondary field A secondary path s path specification will only be displayed if the path is preferred or required You can also see the new paths from the report manager You can open it from Report gt Report Manager If it is already open right click on Network Reports gt Demand Reports gt Demand Path amp Diversity Report and select Re Generate Report In this report each path has its own entry The type field will say SECONDARY or STANDBY if there is a secondary or standby path It will say PR path_ specification or PS path specification where path specification is replaced by an actual path specification nodes separated by dashes if the path was set to be required or preferred PR for path required PS for path select Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc ROUTE OPTIMIZATION his chapter describes how to study the impact of metric changes on demand routes When to use Use these procedures if you want to study the
315. window the user can add multiple routes for a demand in case the link fails in the network To add a backup path press the Add Row button Here the user can enter the name of this back up route in the Pathname field and set the priority of this route in the Opt field In the Opt field the program will select the smallest number to be the primary route The other routes will be the backup routes 29 Once the user has finished entering the pathname and priority for a path the actual path can be set There are two ways to edit a route One is to use the map to select nodes links in the path In the drop down box next to To choose paths select Click links nodes on map then right click in table or Click consecutive nodes starting at Node A Then on the topology map click on the nodes links along the route that you wish to specify Double click on the destination node when it is reached or right click in the table to finish 30 The second method to edit a route is to right click on a row under the Demands Paths associated with this demand section and select Edit Route from the popup menu as shown in Figure 9 13 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 9 7 Demands Paths for this demand To choose paths Click consecutive nodes starting at Node Pathname Figure 9 13 Editing a Path 31 Select Edit Route to begin configuring the paths that this back up route will take When the Edit Route menu
316. with identical source and destination O Aa Z Add traffic only between pairs with different source and destination Fees ee Ten Figure 20 11 Traffic Generation Window with Traffic Profiles 12 To generate a demand file based on any number of traffic profiles shown in the Traffic Generation window simply check the checkbox next to the traffic profiles that you want included in the generated demand file then click the Generate button After the demand file is generated you have the option of loading the demand file into the current network Note that loading a generated demand file into the current network will replace any existing demands in the current network 20 8 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc FILE COMPARISON TOOLS his chapter describes how to compare two network files using the File Com parison feature of the WANDL software Similar to the UNIX diff command the File Comparison tool displays a list of the differences between two selected WANDL input files and highlights them in color to show differences that exist The tool s functionality includes viewing the current version of a file side by side comparison of two files of the same format and saving the differences in a text file on the client machine An enhanced version of the tool the Revision Manager only available in IP network models allows the user to manage different revisions of network files and be able to keep track of changes made
317. work menu from the main window menu bar to view the different types of network information that are accessible in both the View and Design mode These options may vary depending upon the hardware of the current network and your password file Not all of these menu options will be described in this chapter Please consult the following user manuals for device specific features ATM PNNI User Guide Card Cost PNNI Transport Specific User Ring Guide Router Guide Aggreg Tunnels BGP Class of Service Hardware Equipment Cost Interfaces IP VPN LSP Tunnels Multicast Group OSPF Areas Static Route Table General Reference Guide Admin Weight Aggreg Demands Custom Rates Demands and or Design amp Planning Domains SRLG Facilities Hardware Equipment Cost Links Link Guide this manual and Rules Nodes Owners Path amp Capacity Pricer Service Type Service Profile Show Site Demands Sites Summary Templates User Parameters 2 Select Network gt Summary to view the network summary window as shown in Figure 7 1 Network Info lt LS T l Summary x Spec uAwandl sample IP fish spec mpls fish d Hardware Router Cost 2 589 652 ar m Summary Network Elements 14 Avg Hops of Demands 2 951 18 Max Hops of Demands 7 0 Avg Hops of Tunnels 3 400 0 Max Hops of Tunnels 5 1 0 Interfaces Ma Demand BW Tunnels Tunnel BW Placed 182 1 264G 5 36 000M Unplaced 0 0 0 0 Tunnels Deactivated 0 0 0 0 Total 18
318. xl 6 a Figure 14 15 Grouping nodes 5 Open Report Manager and select Network Reports gt Group gt Group Demand Summary by Group Pair The report displays the demand BW between group inter and among the group intra Keep note that the total demand BW 1 264G with intra EAST 78 212MB and intra WEST 181 927MB Report Manager Network Reports Calculation Method Analytical Demand Reports Link Reports Group Type User Defined Group Pi Interface Trafic Group Explanation lt J Multiple Sort Restore M Select Colun Ci Group Demand Summa Group A Group Z Intra Inter EAST CY Group Demand Detail by BY Mbit Group Demand Traffic 0 EAST INTRA 78 212 C Group Demand Traffic of WEST WEST INTRA 181 927 C Group Interface Load Sul SUPERCORE SSUPERCO INTRA 300 301 CS Group Interface Load De EAST WEST INTER 140 302 C Group Demand Bandwi EAST SUPERCO INTER 174 416 C1 Node WEST EAST INTER 189 229 C1 VPN WEST ISUPERCO INTER 152 835 C Protocols SUPERCORE EAST INTER 149 186 C Voice over IP SUPERCORE WEST INTER 197 747 Tunnel Layer Network Reports Delay Summary 3 INTRA Simulation Reports Delay Summary 6 INTER Tunnel Layer Simulation Report Delay Summary 9 BOTH Configuration Reports Customized Reports Figure 14 16 Report Manager Groups 14 20 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 7 10 11 12 13 14 DESIGN Swi
319. y Legends is enabled Deselect Legends to print only the map area Select Legends to print the whole map including left and right pane The final options are explained in the following section Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc USING THE TOPOLOGY WINDOWS Export to Visio This section explains how to export a graphic of the topology display to Visio where it can be manipulated and altered The following formats are supported e VDX format for Visio 2003 e CSV format for Visio 2002 and earlier After opening the CSV file in Visio 2002 the resulting Visio diagram can then be saved to a Visio VSD file using Visio s File gt Save As dialog EXPORT MAP TO VISIO 100 Adjust the map settings node positions labels colors etc so that what you export is currently in view Important Note that only the portion of the network that is in view will be exported The boundaries of the drawing up to the margins coincide with the boundaries on the screen when you exported If you wish to export the whole network use the Zoom to Fit icon square within a magnifying glass on the the upper right icon toolbar of the topology window before you export 101 Right click on the map and select Export for the Export Map window as displayed in Figure 6 33 102 Select a directory on your client machine in which to save the Visio file Then select the Visio file type Visio 2003 and later VDX or Visio 2002 and Earlier CSV 103 If you wis
320. y as described in Creating or Editing a Network File via the Text Editor on page 4 6 Copyright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 4 1 a ne Detailed Procedures 1 After you have logged onto the WANDL client as described in the Getting Started Guide the File Manager window will be displayed as shown in Figure 4 1 File Manager e f a T Delete Refresh Er Help Output Path utwana Browse Current Path luna Files of Type al Files Directories appi proc bind rmdisk clienti shin data space dhi system dcollect trip java i lik C1 wand log Jul mysql _ u TE US Directory trip 2 dewdskicOd0s0 i 81 used Figure 4 1 The File Manager Creating a Spec File The following tutorial demonstrates how to create a spec file CREATING A DIRECTORY FOR YOUR NETWORK 2 Inthe File Manager window navigate to the data directory of WANDL HOME usually u wandl the directory where the WANDL software is installed e g u wandl data Navigation Tip There are multiple ways to navigate If you know the path you can directly type in the directory path after Current Path and press lt Enter gt Note that the path is case sensitive since it is using the Unix filesystem Alternatively you can use the Up folder icon to go up a directory or double click on a folder to look inside a directory Finally you can use the navigation tree in the left pane of the File Manager or
321. ype hardware type of the link end nodes and trunk type The user can also restrict an admin weight rule to apply only to intra site or intra peer group links For these options Don t Care indicates that a rule should be applied regardless of whether the link is intra site or intra peer SPECIFYING A FORMULA USING FIXED AND VARIABLE WEIGHT Given a formula for links in a particular category the default weight for such a link is calculated to be a fixed weight plus the link s airline distance times a variable weight default weight fixed weight link s airline mileage variable weight SETTING MULTIPLE FORMULAS Note that the user can specify several different formulas each to be applied to links with different characteristics In the case that a link fits two sets of characteristics for which two different formulas are defined the formula associated with the more specific criterion will be used For example suppose you specify a fixed weight of 100 and variable weight of 0 for links of any protocol protocol set to ALL and fixed weight of 200 and variable weight of 0 for links of protocol PNNI In this case for PNNI links you would apply the latter more specific formula For non PNNI links you would apply the former formula since that is the only one applicable of the two 16 Switch to Modify mode on your network The Modify drop down menu should be activated 17 Select Modify gt More gt Admin Weight A windo
322. yright 2014 Juniper Networks Inc 14 13 DESIGN 37 Next select Design gt Backbone gt Resize to see the following available menu options Resize based on Demand Traffic 182 demands total bandwidth 12 642G all demands are placed Resize Options Resize based on peak simulation results including traffic load Resize based on normal utilization including traffic load Performs single node linkiSRLG failure simulation and resize O Quit Figure 14 10 Resize Menu 38 Select Resize based on normal utilization including traffic load to resize based on the trafficload file only or Perform single node link SRLG failure simulation and resize to resize based on peak utilization under failure Note that the first option requires that the user manually run an exhaustive failure simulation of their choosing from Simulation gt Simulation Scenarios prior to performing the resize 39 The subsequent menu allows the user to take all recommended updates either for all links or only overloaded links Alternatively the user can view and manually select which links to update ne x Bandwidth of 0 link s can be reduced total 0 Oversubscription occurred at 18 link s Bandwidth Increase 24 3046 Total links 18 0 fixed Reserved Bandwidth 0 00 No Action Update All Links 18 candidates O Update Overloaded Links Only 18 candidates ei View Changes or Update Selected Links Fi

WANDL Training Guide for NPAT and IP

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents